(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Epictetus and the New Testament"

EPICTETUS 



AND THE 



NEW TESTAMENT. 



EPICTETUS 



AND THE 



NEW TESTAMENT 



BY 

DOUGLAS S. SHARP, M.A., B.D. (Manch.), 

Late Wellington and Bishop Lee Greek Testament 
Prizeman at Manchester University. 



LONDON : 
CHARLES H. KELLY, 

25-35, CITY ROAD, AND 26, PATERNOSTER ROW, E.G. 



S5 



First Edition^ 19 14. 



MEINEM LIEBCHEN, 



298523 



CONTENTS. 



Foreword by Dr. Moulton 
Introduction 



I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VIII. 

IX. 



X. 



XI. 



Phrases Similar or Identical 

Nouns 

Pronouns (including the Article) 

Adjectives 

Verbs .... 

Adverbs and Prepositions 

Conjunctions and Particles 

Sundries .... 

Resemblances between Epictetus and 
the New Testament in Thought and 
Teaching 

Differences between Epictetus and 
THE New Testament in Language, 
Thought and Teaching 

how to account for the resemblances. — 
Had Epictetus Relations with 

Christianity? 

Index to Greek Words 

Index to References 

Index to Subjects 



PAGB. 

ix 
xi 



15 
36 
48 

63 
88 

95 

lOI 



107 



126 



132 
139 
143 
157 



FOREWORD. 

I GLADLY accept the opportunity of offering a 
foreword to my old pupil's study of contacts 
between Epictetus and the New Testament. It 
was on my suggestion that he took up this subject 
for linguistic research ; but the arrival of the proofs 
of a book was a surprise to me. A very rapid 
glance over the pages has made the surprise a 
welcome one. 

In grammatical as well as lexical questions, as 
this book well shows, Epictetus has much to teach 
us. I might remark in this connexion that Mr. 
Sharp (p. 6i) remembers my obiter dicta better 
than I do. I do not now feel so sure about the 
use of ft)9 suggested there, but I must look into it 
further. 

A wider circle than those who study New Testa- 
ment Greek will find much interest in the few 
pages which present parallels in Epictetus' thought. 
They should send some English readers to the 
accessible discourses of a very noble 'heathen,' 
whose * feeling after God ' was assuredly not 

without reward. 

James Hope Moulton. 
May 21, 1914. , 



INTRODUCTION. 



The following chapters represent an attempt to 
deal with Resemblances in Language, Thought, 
and Teaching — together with certain Differences — 
which exist between the works of Epictetus and 
the New Testament. To speak of Language only, 
in Epictetus there are often found the same nouns, 
adjectives, pronouns, verbs, verbal forms, pre- 
positions, conjunctions, particles, the same syntax 
as in the New Testament. 

The texts used are, for Epictetus, H. Schenkl's 
Editio Minor in the Teubner Series (1898), and for 
the New Testament that of Westcott and Hort. 
The author has found invaluable Moulton-Geden's 
Concordance to the New Testament, and Mrs. 
Carter's Translation of the Moral Discourses of 
Epictetus in the Everyman's Library (edited by Dr. 
W. H. D. Rouse) ; he moreover acknowledges his 
indebtedness to Prof J. H. Moulton, not only for 
his writings, but also for many impressions received 
during the few years that he had the great privilege 
of being his pupil. . 



Xll INTRODUCTION. 

The usual abbreviations have been employed, 
such as 'Matt' for Matthew, ' E.' for Epictetus, 
' N.T.' for New Testament. In regard to the 
references to Epictetus, 'Bk.' signifies one of the 
Books of the Discourses, ' Ench.' the Encheiridion 
or Manual, 'Frag. Diss.' the Fragments of the 
Discourses, ' Stob.' Fragments from Stobaeus, 'Cod. 
Vat.' Maxims found in a Vatican Manuscript of 
the 14th century. Amongst other abbreviations, 
' Proleg.' for Dr. J. H. Moulton's Grammar of New 
Testament Greek : Volume I., Prolegomena (ist 
edition). 



EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



CHAPTER I. 

Phrases Similar or Identical. 

A. — Possible Imitations of New Testament Passages. 

Our immediate object in this section is to place 
side by side sentences or phrases taken from 
Epictetus and the New Testament respectively 
which display a marked resemblance to one 
another, not so much in the thought which they 
express, nor yet in the syntactical form in which 
they have been composed, as in the actual choice 
and arrangement of the words themselves. Little 
comment will be necessary ; in the comments that 
are made we want, as far as we can, to leave the 
question of the explanation of these resemblances 
to a later stage. 

In view of this statement, perhaps, the choice of 
the title for this section is unfortunate, but we 
would suggest that the term ' possible ' still leaves 
the question open. 

Thirteen examples are appended. 

I. E. N.T. 

6 ^eXf t ov TTOiel Koi o fxr) ov yap o deXo) tovto irpaacrai, 

BiXei TTOiet. — Bk. II., ch. xxvi., aXX' o fxiorSi tovto ttoiw. el 8e o 
§ 4. ov $eX(o TOVTO TroiS> . . . — Rom. 

^ vii. 15, 16. 

B 



EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

E. says that error is unintentional. St. Paul — 
speaking probably of his own experience just 
previous to his conversion — asserts that, contrary 
to his own desires and better judgment, he sinned 
because he could not help himself. 



2. E. 

TJ6Xr](ras. — Bk. III., ch. x, 
§8. 

' if thou hast contended 
according to the rules.' 



N.T. 

(env 8e Koi d6}<fj ny, ov 
(TT€(f)avovTai) eav fifj vofxi^cds 
dBXrjrrr}. — 2 Tim. ii. 5. 

' (he will not be crowned) 
unless he shall have con- 
tended according to the 
rules.' 



E. and St. Paul quite naturally use the technical 
terms that were current ; any suggestion of the 
imitation of one by the other falls into the 
background. 



3. E. I N.T.. 

dW eyo) (Toi Xcyw. — Bk. j cyco 8i Xcyo) vfiiv. — Matt. v. 
III., ch. vii., § 13. 22, 28, etc. 



E. in contrast with Epi- 



Our Lord in contrast with 



curus. 



I the Old Testament. 



The teacher's word of authority, 'But / say 



unto 



4. 



(thee.' 
tyou.' 



E. 



OVTCO KUL VjXClS TTOieiTf. 

II., ch. xvii., §34. 



I N.T. 

-Bk. ovTcos Koi vficls TToielre 

I (avTols). — Matt. vii. 12. 



* So also do you.' 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 



5- , . ^■, 

KOL tIs (Toi ravTTjv Trjv i^ov- 
criav Se'Sco/cei/ ; — Bk. I., ch. 
xxix., § II. 



N.T. 
Koi TIS (TOI eSoiKep rfjp e^ov 
(Tiav TavTTjv ; — Matt. xxi. 23. 



^ And who {^ave^^^"^"!^^^^ ^^^^ authority r 



:gave 
6. E. 

(dovXov) ... 6 Kvpios avTov 
dno^rjuel. — Bk. IV., ch. i., 
§58. 

The slave's master goes 
on a journey. 

(orau yovv irddrj tls otl €v- 
(Ko)yov), dneXOcov dnqy^aro. — 
Bk. I., ch. ii., § 3. 

(' Whenever then anyone 
has discovered that it is 
reasonable) he goes away 
and hangs himself.' 



N.T. 

avOptoTTOs aTTohrifiwv CKdXea-eu 
Tovs I8I0VS dovXovs . . . Koi 
dnedrjixTjaev . . . /acto Se iroKvv 
Xpdvov epx^rai 6 Kvptos rav 
8ov\a>u (Kfivcov. — Matt. XXV. 
14, 15, 19. 

N.T. 

(koi pl\lras to. dpyvpia els top 
vaov dvex^Plf^^^i '^"O dneXOwv 
dnqy^uTo. — Matt, xxvii. 5. 

'(And casting the silver 
coins into the temple, he de- 
parted and) went away and 
hanged himself.' 



We notice that in E. dirriy^aTo is gnomic aorist, 
while in N.T. it is simple narrative. In spite of 
that we are tempted to ask : 'is it mere coincidence 
that E. and Matt, use the same phrase, or can it be 
that E. used the story of Judas to illustrate his 
fibint that a man does sometimes think it reason- 
able to commit suicide in this way ? ' 

8. E. j N.T. 

€Kciv(ov xpeiav flx^v n deus. — ' o Kvpios avTiov xp^^av i'x^i- — 
Bk. I., ch. vi., § 13. i Matt. xxi. 3. 

' God had need of them ' ' The Lord hath need of 

(animals). ^ ' them' (the ass and colt). 

B 2 



EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



9- _ E-_ 

Spare ovv Koi Tvpocrix^Te, 
(fifj. . .). — Bk. I., ch. iii., § 9. 

'Take heed and beware 
(lest...).' 

10. E. 

^r}T€i Koi (vpr](r€LS, — Bk. I., 
ch. xxviii., § 19 ; Bk. IV., 
ch. i., § 51. 

' Seek and thou shalt find.' 

11. E. 

(ravra fieWeis paprvpelv kol) 
Karaia-xvveiv rrjv KKfjo-iv rjv K€- 
KXrjKev ; — Bk. I., ch. xxix., 

§49- 

' (Are you going to give 
this as your testimony and) 
bring disgrace on the calling 
with which he has called 
you?' 

12. E. 
(tou Oeou eTTLKaXovi-icpoL §eo- 

fjLfda avTov ') Kvpt-f, eXerjcrov. 
— Bk. II., ch. vii., § 12. 

In a passage dealing with 
divination : ' (calling upon 
God we entreat Him,) " Lord 
have mercy." ' 



N.T. 

opare Kal npo(T€)(€Te (otto 
TJys C^prjs. . .). — Matt. xvi. 6. 

'Take heed and beware 
(of the leaven ...).' 

N.T. 

^T^reire Koievprjo-eTe, — Matt, 
vii. 7. 

' Seek and you shall find.' 

N.T. 

{irapaKokS) ovv vpas cyco . • . ) 
d^icoy nepiTraTrja-at rf)? KXrjaeMs 
^s eKkrjOrjre. — Eph. iv. I. 

' (I therefore beseech you) 
to walk in a manner worthy 
of the calling with which you 
were called.' 



N.T. 

[ical Idov dvo TVff)\oi . . . 
eKpa^av Xdyovres,) Kv/ne, cXe- 
r](rov (rjpas). — Matt. XX. 30, 
31 ; also Matt. xvii. 15. 

' (And behold two blind 
men . . . cried, saying : " Lord, 
have mercy (on us)." ' 

At first we are tempted to ask whether the 
phrase Kvpie, iXerjaov was part of the Church's 
liturgy in E.'s time and, if so, whether he adopted 
it. But, on the other hand, Kvpio^ was in common 
use as a divine title, in which case the phrase would 
be perfectly natural. 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 



13. 



Bk. il., ch. xii., § 17. 

' For he who does it, it 
is clear, must not do it in a 
corner.' 



N.T. 

ov yap i(TTLv eV yavla Tre- 
TTpayfiivoif tovto. — Acts xxvi. 
26. 

' For it is not in a corner 
that this thing has been 
done.' 



This phrase denoting secrecy — iroielv {or irpda- 
aeLv) Ti iv ^(ovla — is evidently a current proverb 
found quite as naturally on the lips of E. as on 
those of St. Paul. Any possibility of imitation on 
the part of E. becomes the more remote in view of 
the many instances of the term ^wvla in his writ- 
ings, e.g. KaOrjiJuevov iv ycovla. — Bk. I., ch. xxix., § 36 ; 
iv ycovia KaOe^ofievoL. — Bk. I., ch. xxix., § 55. In these 
two instances again ' sitting in a corner ' denotes 
secrecy. We must add that the position is 
considerably strengthened by the statement of 
Knowling {Expos. Greek Testameiit, Vol. 1 1., 
p. 512) that the phrase in question occurs in Plato : 
Gorgias, 485 D. 



B. — Verbal Phrases. 



I. E. 

etff T<yv Oeov dcfyopfovras (iV 
TTavTi Koi fiiKp<^ Koi fieyaXw). — 
Bk. II., ch. xix., § 29. 

' Looking away unto God 
(in everything both small and 
great).' 



N.T. 

d(Jiopa)VT(s €is (tov rrjf rrtcr- 
T€a)S dpxrjyov Koi Te\eio}Ti]v) 
'It/o-ow. — Heb. xii. 2. 

' Looking away unto (the 
author and perfecter of our 
faith) Jesus.' 



2. u}<\>€Kov — in N.T. written o^eXoi/- -' would that, 
with 3rd person. 



6 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

E. I N.T. 

(i>(f)€\6u Tis fieTo. TavTTjs €Koi- I o(f)e\ov Ka\ dnoKoyjrovTai ol 

tiyjOr). — Bk. II., ch. xviii.,§ 15. I dvaa-rarovvrfs v/iuy. — Gal. v*, 

I 12. 

cjcpeXov with ist person is common in E., e.g. 
(o(f)€\ov 0)9 (l)peva<; e^^o) ovro) Koi tu^t^i^ cl^ov. — 
Bk. II., ch. xxi., § I, but it is not found in N.T. 

On the other hand (w</)eXoz/ with 2nd person is 
not found in E., but it occurs three times in N.T., 
viz. : — o(j)€X6v ye i^aaiXeuaare. — I Cor. iv. 8. ocpeXov 
dveLX^aOi fzov /niKpov tl a^poavvrj^. — 2 Cor. xi. I. 
6(^e\ov yjrvxpo^ V^ V fecTTo?. — Rev. iii. 1 5. 
3.^ E. j N.T. 

oTdv eh o-avTOV €\6i]s. — Bk. i els eavrou he e\66iv . . . — 

III., ch. i., § 15. j Luke XV. 17. 

' When thou hast come to ■ ' But when he came to 

thyself.' i himself.' 

Sin drives a man out of his senses. 

4. 7r/)09 with Accusative after Xe^o). 

E. I N.T. 

rovTo ovv ov TToXXciKts' (TV CommoTi, e.g 

avros elnes npos tovs eraipovs ; \ Koi elivav Xeyovres irpos av- 



Ti)v . . . — Luke XX. 2. 
' And they said to him. 



— Bk. III., ch. xxvi., § 3. 

' Is not this then what 
thou didst often say to thy 
companions ? ' 

This is found also in Plato, e.g. Xeyco Se touto ov 
77/009 TTCLVTa^ vfjba^. — Apology 38 C. 'I do not say 
this to you all.' 

5. 1X7] yevoLTo. 

This is very common in E,, giving a strong 
repudiation, e.g. Bk. I., ch. i., § 13. It is equally 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 



common in N.T. in the same sense, and especially 
in St. Paul's writings, e.g. Rom. iii. 4. 

6. 8o/c(o followed by dative of 1st person singular 
in the sense of * I think.' 



E. 

(jroXv vr) Aia Ta>v iiWcov 

TOVTO a^(LVOv) doKOi flOL (/Cf- 

KTrj(r6ai). — Bk. II., ch. xii., 
§ 21. 

' I really do think (that 
this is a much better posses- 
sion than the others).' 



N.T. 

iyoi fiiv ovv €%)^a (fxavTco 
(npos TO ovofia ^Irjaov rof; 
Na^twpai'ov Seti/ TroXXa evavria 
irpa^ai). — Acts xxvi. 9. 

' I verily thought (that I 
must do many things in op- 
position to the name of Jesus 
of Nazareth).' 

7. a</)e9 with 1st person subjunctive in the sense of 

' let me.' This is common in E. and in N.T., 

e.g. :— 

N.T. 

a(j)€S e/c/SaXo) to Kdp(fios e< 
Tov ocfiOaXfxov (Tov. — Matt, 
vii. 4. 

' Let me pull out the mote 
out of thy eye.' 



a(^es iSo) TLS 6t. — Bk. II., 
ch. xviii., § 24. 

'Let me see what thou 
art.' 



C. — Adverbial Phrases, 

I. KojjL^lra)<; ex^iV) ' to be well,' * to be in a fair way/ 
after illness. 

N.T. 

iTTvdeTO ovv TtjV dpuv trap* 
avToav fv jj Kop.'^OTfpov fax^v. — 
John iv. 52. 

' He inquired of them 
therefore the hour in which 
he began to improve.' 



(^oTap 6 laTpos €l(TipXf}Taiy 
. . ./XT^S' tiu etivrj) KOfxy^ois ex^^S" 

...— Bk. III., ch. X., §13. 

' (When the physician 
comes in, . . . not even if he 
has said,) "thou art in a 
fair way." ' 



8 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



The phrase is also used impersonally in E. of a 
man recovering from bad temper : — (yi^vwaKe oti 
KofJL^fr(o<; aol iarc. — Bk. II., ch. xviii., § 14. ' Recog- 
nise that it is well with thee.' 
2. 77/909 oXlyov ' for a little (time).' 



N.T. 

T] yap aufxaTiKt] yvuvatria 
Trpor oXiyov iarXv o)(f)iXifxos. — 
I Tim. iv. 8. 

' For bodily exercise is pro- 
fitable for a little.' 

drfus yap eVre npos oXiyov 
(pcuvoiJievT]. — James iv. 14. 

* For you are a vapour 
appearing for a little time.' 



E. 

o be TTpos oklyov rja-deX^ 
pcwTia. — Bk. IV., ch. ix., § 4. 

' But the other after being 
delighted for a little while 
grows sick.' 

orav d(p^s, (firjai, npos uXiyov 
Tjjv Tvpoa-oxifv . . . — Bk. IV., 
ch. xii., § I. 

'Whenever, he says, thou 
dost let go thy attention for I 
a little while.' i 

3. iva Ti; in the sense of ' v^)\y } \ 'yevr^Tai being 
understood, occurs once in E. : Xva rl ; ov 'yap 
apKel . . . — Bk. I., ch. xxix., § 31. 'Why ? is it not 
sufficient . . . .^ ' 

It is common in N.T., e.g. iva rl evOvfieiaOe 
TTovTjpa iv Tat9 Kaphlat^ v/jlmv ; — Matt. ix. 4. ' Why 
do you imagine evil things in your hearts ? ' 

D. — Adjectival Phrases. 
I. 7] olKoviJiivr] in the sense of ' the world ' (777 being 
understood) is common in E. and N.T., e.g. : — 

N.T. 

p-eXXet Kpivfip rrjv olKovpevrjv 
iv biKaiocrvvrj. — Acts xvii. 31. 

' He shall judge the world 
in righteousness.' 



E. 

hia Ti. . .ware. . .npos avrov 
epX^adai rovs €K ttjs oIkov- 
pevrjs ; — Bk. III., ch. i., § 18. 

* Why ... so that ... the 
inhabitants of the world 
come to him ? ' 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 9 

2. 7) ariixepov rjfJLepa, a somewhat redundant ex- 
pression for ' to-day,' occurs once in E. and three 
times in N.T. 



E. 

airo TJ/s (rfjfxcpov roivvv 
r]fi4pas ov8ev oKXo eTncrKnTrijao- 
fxev. — Bk. I., ch. xi., § 38. 

' From to-day then we 
shall consider nothing else.' 



N.T. 
fiapTvpoixai vpiviv rrj (rrjfiepov 
Tjpipa. — Acts XX. 26. 

' I testify to you to-day.' 
Also Rom. xi. 8 and 2 Cor. 
1 iii. 14. 



Sometimes in N.T. rj/jiepa is omitted, e.g. efieivev 
av fiexpt T?}? arjfjL€pop. — Matt. xi. 23. 'It would 
have remained until to-day.' 



E. — Nou7t Clauses. 

I. iirlfyvaycnq t^9 aX7}0ela<!, 'knowledge of the truth* 
— the aim of Philosophy and God's purpose for 
ourselves : — 

Xa/Scoj/ . . . Kavuuas els eVt- \ 
yvoxriP Trjs aXtjOeias ... — | 



Bk. II., ch. XX., § 21. 

* Having received . . . rules i 

for the knowledge of the ; 

truth...' ! 

2. The association of 86^a 
E. 

In reference to the gran- 
deur of office : 

orav 81" avras ras vnareias Kol 
Ti)v 86^av Kol rfjp €7n<pdveiav . . . 
— Bk. III., ch. xxii., §29. | 

'Whenever on account of | 
the Consulships themselves | 
and their glory and spleft- 1 
dour...' j 



N.T. 

pera to Xa^elp ttjp eiriyvcoaip 
Trjs dXtjOeias. — Heb. X. 26. 

Also — with the omission of 
TTjs — I Tim. ii. 4, 2 Tim. ii. 
25, iii. 7, Tit. i. I. 



and iincpdveia : — 
N.T. 

In reference to the Second 
Coming of Christ : 

npocrde^opepoL ttjp paKapiap 
cXntda Koi €7n(f)dpciap tjJs do^ijs 
Tov peydXov Qeov. — Tit. ii. 13- 

' Waiting for the blessed 
hope and manifestation of 
the glory of our great God.' 



10 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



We notice that So^a is used in the N.T. sense of 
' glory,' * brightness,' and not in the classical sense 
of * opinion,' * reputation.' 

3. %a/3f9 TM Oeoj, 'thanks to God,' is found once in 
E. and six times in N.T. : — 



E. 

Tore KOL eyoi) rjfxilpTavov. 

VVV 8' OVk4tI, X^P'S' TO) 0f&). — 

Bk. IV., ch. iv., §7.' 

' Then I too was faulty ; 
but, thanks to God, not 
now.' 



N.T. 
X"pts 8e T(p 0fO) 8ui ^IrjO-ov 

XplCTTOV TOV KVpinv JjfXWV. — 

Rom. vii. 25. 

' But thanks to God through 
our Lord Jesus Christ.' 

Also Rom. vi. 17, i Cor. 
XV. 51, 2 Cor. ii. 14, viii. 16, 
ix. 15. 



We may compare with the above iroWr} %a/3i9 
auT(Z in E. — Bk. IV., ch. v., § 9. * Many thanks to 
him.' 

4. rj <^v(TL<; Tf av6p(07rlv7j, ' human nature,' occurs once 
in E. and once in N.T. : — 



E. 

ovras 'lax^pov tl kol dvUrjTop 
i(TTiv J} (jjvais 17 dvd()a>7rivr]. — 
Bk. II., ch. XX., § 18. 

* So strong and uncon- 
querable a thing is human 
nature.' 



N.T. 

TTctara yap (pvais OrjpLCiv re Kal 
7r€T€iv(i)V, ipnfTiov T€ Koi ivaXloiv 
dapLci^erai koi dcdafxaarai rfj 
(f}V(TCi Tji dpdpoiTTLVr]. — Jamcs 
iii. 7. 

' For every nature of beasts 
and birds, creeping things 
and things in the sea is being 
tamed and has been tamed 
by the human nature.' 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 



II 



F. — Pronominal Phrases. 

I. oval, 'alas,' Svoe,' followed by the dative, which 

is very common in N.T., occurs twice in E., e.g. : — 

E. 

ovai not. — Bk. III., ch. xix., 

§ I, ch. xxii., § 32. 



Alas for me.' 



N.T. 

ovai yap fioi. — I Cor. ix. 



ovai vfilv. — Luke xi. 43, &c., 
and many other examples. 



2. t/ followed by two datives united by Kat in the 
sense of ' what has A to do with B .? ' is common 
both in E. and N.T. Dr. Moffatt comments on 
such phrases in the Expositor for January, 191 3, 
p. 94. 

E. N.T. 

rt e/ioi KCLi (Toi ; — Mark v. 7, 
Luke viii. 28, John ii. 4. 

' What have I to do with 
thee .? ' 

ri TjixLu Koi aoL ; — Matt. viii. 
29, Mark i. 24, Luke iv. 34. 

' What have we to do with 
thee ? ' 

Dr. Moffatt's comment on 
John ii. 4 is appHcable to 
each of these examples, viz. 
that the phrase 'is occa- 
sioned by a resentment of 
interference.' 



Ti fxoL Kol avT^ ; — Bk. L, 
ch. xxii., § 15 (bis). 

' What have I to do with 
him?' (Zeus). 

tI ifiol Koi avTols ; — Bk. I., 
ch. xxvii., § 13. 

' What have I to do with 
them ? ' (the gods). 

Dr. Moffatt's comment on 
these two passages is that 
they express the complaint 
of neglect or indifference, 
Zeus and the gods refusing 
help when it was expected. 

The following instance may 
be explained in a similar way. 

rl r}fuv KoX aoi ; — Bk. II., 
ch. xix., § 16. 

' What have we to do with 
thee ? ' — to a man in a ship- 
wreck who does not try to 
rescue others, but jests. • 



12 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT 



E. 

Each of the remaining 
instances receives from its 
context a meaning similar 
to that of each of the N.T. 
passages : an expression of 
resentment at interference. 

Tt rjfilp Koi avria ; — Bk. I., 
ch. i., § l6. 

' What have we to do with 
that ? ' (the North Wind). 

Whether it blows or not is 
God's concern, not ours. 

Tt iyLoi Koi <roi ; — Bk. II., 
ch. xix., § 19. 

' What have I to do with 
thee.-^' — to a man who wanted 
to add to his ills. 

TL yap crot Koi rjfxiv ; — Bk. 1 1. 
ch. XX., § II. 

' What hast thou to do 
with us.?' — following a re- 
quest to a teacher not to 
concern himself about others. 

Similarly — 

Ti (Tot Koi TO) dXXorpio) KaKO) ; 
— Bk. III., ch. xviii., §8. 

'What hast thou to do 
with another man's evil ? ' 

A very fine instance : — 

TL 6e aoi Koi ro7s dWorpiois ; 
Tis yap ei ; 6 ravpos et ^ t] 
fiaarikKTcra t5)v fxiXio-a-cop ; — 
Bk. III., ch. xxii., §99. 

'What hast thou to do 
with the concerns of others ? 
What art thou ? Art thou 
the bull (of the herd) or the 
queen of the bees ? ' 



PHRASES SIMILAR OR IDENTICAL. 13 

G. — A Phrase that Resembles a * Hebraism' 

In Bk. IL, ch. xxiL, § 36, we find the following 
words : — et^o)? aKpiPui<; to tov ITXaTwyo?, or* iraara 
^jrvxv cLKovaa areperai tt)? aXrjOela^, which we 
translate, ' knowing accurately the teaching of 
Plato, that no soul is willingly deprived of the 
truth.' 

For the present our attention is taken up by the 
phrase irda-a '^v^V ct/covaa. "AKovaa being regarded 
as equivalent to ou% e/covaa, the phrase becomes 
an example of the use of Tra? with a negative in 
the sense of ' no one,' and it is in this way that we 
have translated it. Any other translation seems to 
us impossible. 

In this case the phrase bears a striking resem- 
blance to various New Testament passages that 
once were regarded as * Hebraisms,' i.e. Hebraic or 
Aramaic constructions. We instance three : — 

ov Si/catcoOijaerat iracra aap^ evcoTriov avrov. — 
Rom. iii. 20. ' Before Him shall no flesh be 
justified.' 

7ra9 7r6pvo<; fj aKaOapTO^ . . . ov/c €%€* /cXrjpovofiiav 
ev TT) jSacTLXeLa rov ^piarov Koi ®eov. — Eph. v. 5- 
' No fornicator or unclean person . . . has inheritance 
in the Kingdom of the Christ and God.' 

ovK av ia-coOr] irdaa crdp^. — Mark xiii. 20. * No 
flesh would have been saved.' 

Of these instances the first and last may be 
regarded as Translation-Greek, the first being a 
translation (or rather adaptation) of Psalm cxliii. 2, 
the last a translation from the Aramaic. In the 



14 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

case of the second we might argue that St. Paul, 
being a Jew, reproduced in Greek, by translation, 
an Aramaic construction. But, even so, can we 
thus explain the passage in Epictetus i* If it be 
suggested that Epictetus imitated the New Testa- 
ment, we ask, why should he do so if there were a 
more natural Greek mode of expression ? 

Is this not rather evidence that 7rd<; . . . ov, so 
far from being merely Translation-Greek, was a 
regular Hellenistic idiom ? And surely, if we are 
to understand the phrase as a quotation from Plato 
— etSft)9 cLKpL^oi^ TO ToO IlXaTco^'o? — the possibility 
of Hebraic influence becomes very remote. We 
are wondering if the Papyri will throw any light on 
the matter. 

(Since I wrote the above Dr. J. H. Moulton has 
granted me permission to insert the following note, 
which will be seen to answer our query : — * In the 
Ry lands Papyri, vol. II, now passing through the 
press, there is an interesting example of this idiom 
in a very ungrammatical petition from a bee-keeper 
named Hieracion, of Letopolis, complaining of 
injury from people fxr) e^ovra^; irav Trpdyfia tt/oo? 
6/xe, "who have no grievance against me." The 
papyrus is dated 133 A.D. See on this idiom 
Proleg. iii., p. 245 f. I think it was probably 
admissible Greek, though decidedly uncommon.') 



CHAPTER II. 

Nouns. 

In the list appended nouns in general use in 
Classical Greek, in Epictetus and in the New 
Testament have been omitted. Any exceptions 
to this rule are due to a remarkable parallelism 
between E. and N.T. 



I. ayyapeia. 

This term, denoting compulsion applied to a 
man or appropriation of a beast of burden or 
carriage for military purposes, occurs once in E. 
This term is not found in N.T., but the correspond- 
ing verb dyyapevo) occurs three times : — 

E. 

av 6' dyyapcia fj koX crrpa- 
Tia)Tr]s eViXa/STyrat, a(f)€Sj fxr} 
dvTLT€iv€ fxrjbe yoyyv^e. — Bk. 
IV., ch. i., § 79. 

(Referring to an ass : — ) 
' But if there should be a 
press and a soldier lay 
hands on it, let it go, do 
not resist or murmur.' 



N.T. 

Kol ocTTis ae dyyapevaei 
fiiXiov ev, vTraye /xer' avrov 
dvo. — Matt. V. 41. 

' And whosoever shall 
compel thee to go one mile, 
go with him two.' 

TovTov rjyydpeva-av iva apt} 
TOP (TTavpbv avTov. — Matt, 
xxvii. 32. 

' Him they compelled to 
bear His cross.' 

Koi dyyapevovcriv irapdyovrd 
Tiva . . . Lva apr) tov aravpov 
avrov, — Mark xv. 21. 



15 



l6 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

2. dBeXcpo^. 

This occurs once in E. as a term applied to a 
friend, not, as we might expect, according to Deiss- 
mann {Bible Studies, p. Z%)^ in a technical sense as 
of a member of a religious community. It is also 
used in the natural sense of ' brother ' — e.g. Bk. L, 
ch. xxii., § \o\ V. p. 22. It is very common in 
N.T., where it often denotes a member of the 
Christian Church : — 



E. 

a8fX(j^c, ovdiva aov e'x^co cv- 

VUV<TT€pOV Ov8e (f)iXT€f)OV. — 

Bk. IV., ch. xiii., § i8. 

'Brother, I have no one 
more kindly disposed or 
dearer than thou.' 



N.T. 

dWa ddeXfjios jacTa dBe\(f)ov 
Kpiuerai.- — I Cor. vi. 6. 

* But brother goeth to law 
with brother.' 

Also John i. 41, &c. 



3. atpeatf;. 

In the sense of ' sect ' this occurs once in E. and 
often in N.T. : — 



E. 

TT/petre ovtcos eavTovs iv ols 
enpaao-ere koX evpfjcreTe rivos 
iaB' alpeaeojs. rovs nXelaTovs 
vpci>v ^KniKovpeiovs eupr/crere, 
oXiyovs Tivas nepinaTrjTiKovs 
. . . — Bk. II., ch. xix., § 20. 

' Observe yourselves thus 
in your actions and you will 
find of what sect you are. 
Most of you you will find to 
be Epicureans, a few Peri- 
patetics.' 



N.T. 

TrpmToaraTrjv re rrjs Ta>v 
l>ia((opaia)v aipecreais. — ActS 
xxiv. 5. 

' A ringleader of the sect 
of the Nazarenes.' 

del pev KoX aipiaets iv vplv 
elvai. — I Cor. xi. 19. 

* There must also be sects 
among you.' 

Also Acts V. 17, XV. 5, &c. 



NOUNS. 



17 



4. ala'x^poXo^ia. 

This term, meaning 



shameful/ 



I.e. 



indecent 



N.T. 

vvv\ bi aTToOeaOe Koi v/xet? 
. . .alo-xpoXoyiav eV tov (Tto- 
fxaTos vfia>v. — Col. iii. 8. 

' But now do you also put 
off. . . shameful speaking out 
of your mouth.' 



Speaking/ occurs twice in E. and once in N.T. :- 
E. 

(Assuming av nefjinoL^ from 
the previous sentence) ov8' 
avrl alaxpoKoyias aido). — Bk, 
IV., ch. iii., § 2. 

' Not even (if thou hast 
got) modesty in return for 
indecent speaking.' 

fTTKTcfiaXes be koi to els ala- 
Xpokoylav ivpoeXOelv. — Ench. 
xxxiii., § 16. 

'But dangerous also is 
the approach to indecent 
speaking.' 

5. aldiv. 

This word, lit. ' age/ which is very common in 
N.T., especially in the indefinite sense of ' eternity/ 
occurs once in E. and apparently in this usual N.T. 
sense : — 



E. 

ov yap elpn. alcov, aXX civ- 
Spanos, fiepos Tfbv iravToav wy 
u>pa rjfxepas. — Bk. II., ch. v., 

§13. 

' For I am not an age ' (i?;' 

'eternity'), 'but a man, a 
part of the whole, as an hour 
of a day.' 



N.T. 

6 rpwyuyv tovtov tov QpTov 
C^cei els TOV alava. — John vi . 
58. 

' He that eateth this bread 
shall live unto the age.' 

Also John iv. 14, viii. 51, 
&c. 



6. aKOT]. 

In Classical Greek and often in N.T. this term 
has the meaning 'heaj;ing' or 'report.' Once, 

c 



l8 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



however, in E. and three times in N,T. it is used in 
the sense of ' ear ' : — 



E. 

(In comparison with com- 
mon sense — 6 koivos vovs) 
koivT) Tis aKof] XeyoiT tiv rj 

flOVOV CfiCiVQiV duiKpiriKT]. Bk. 

III., oh. vi., §4. 

'That would be called a 
common ear which distin- 
guishes only sounds.' 



7. avacnpo^r). 

This term in the sense 
haviour,' occurs once in E. 



Trwy tiv cvpoi 6 koKos kcu dyaSos 
. . . uva(TTpo(f)j}v Tr)U [eV] avTjj 
K(i6i']Kov(Tav. — Bk. I., ch. vii., 
§2. 

' For in every subject of 
action our quest is how the 
noble and good man may 
find ... a method of beha- 
viour suitable to the occa- 
sion.' 



N.T. 

rivoiyT)(Tav avTov al aKoai. — 
Mark vii. 35. 

' His ears were opened.' 

enetbrj inXrjpcoacv rrdvTa rii 
prjixara avTov els Tcis UKoas rod 
Xaov. — Luke vii. i. 

'When He had ended. all 
His sayings in the ears of 
the people.' 

^eviCovra yap Tiva clcrcjjepeis: 
els Tiis uKoas rjpojv. — Acts 
xvii. 20. 

' For thou bringest certain 
strange things to our ears.' 



of ' manner of life,' * be- 
and often in N.T. : — 

N.T. 

T]Kov(raT€ yap rrjp epfju dvaa- 
Tpo(f}r)v TTorf eu Toi 'lovSaVfr^w. , . 
—Gal. i. 13. ' 

' For you (have) heard of 
the manner of life that was 
once mine in the Jews' re- 
ligion.' 

rrjP dvaaTpoc})i)v vputv iv rots 
eOuecnv e\oj>T€s KoKtjV. — I Pet. 
ii. 12. 

' Having your manner of 
life fair among the Gentiles.' 

Also Eph. iv. 22, &c. 



NOUNS. 



19 



The fact that E. uses this term in an ethical 
sense helps to confirm the argument of Deissmann 
{Bible Studies, p. 194), that the term in question, 
being found in an Inscription of Carpathos of the 
2nd century B.C., is in no sense a * Hebraism ' — not 
even Translation- Greek. 

8. ave^LKaKia. 

In the sense of * patience (amid evil) ' this occurs 
once in E., but not in N.T. In N.T., however, the 
corresponding Adjective ave^UaKof; is found once : — 

E. I N.T. 

8ov\ov Se Kvpiov ov bet fio-X' 
ea6at, dWa fjmov eivai npos 
ndvras, 6iSaKrtKoi/, ctve^iKaKov. 
— 2 Tim. ii. 24. 

* But the Lord's slave must 
not strive, but be gentle to- 
wards all, apt to teach, for- 
bearing.' 



(Assuming from the pre- 
vious clause Trpoa-cjieprjTai as 
the verb for the protasis) av 
XotSopta, fvpqaeis dve^iKaKiav. 
— Ench. X. 

* If abuse (be presented 
to thee) thou shalt find 
patience.' 



9. ap)(^tT€KTa}V. 

Familiar as it is in the sense of ' architect/ 
* master builder,' this term cannot be overlooked, 
because St. Paul applies it to himself as an Apostle. 
It occurs once in E. : — 



(Assuming from the pre- 
vious sentence ccoprjTo as the 
verb of the protasis and for 
the apodosis vnijpeTr) av avr^ 
fXprjTo ^ Kvpi(o ;) ei 8' larpopy 
ojcravro)?, el 8' dpxireKTova. — 
Bk. IV., ch. i., §117. • 



N.T. 

as ao<p6s dpxvriKTOiv 6epi- 
\iov eOrjKa, aWos 8e eiroiKO- 
dopet. — I Cor. iii. 10. 

'As a wise' {or 'skilful') 
'master-builder I laid a 
foundation, but another 
builds thereon.' 

C 2 



20 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
'But if, 
bought a physician or archi- 
tect, would he have treated 
him as a servant or as a 
master ? ' 

10. ^aalXiaaa. 
The N.T. term for 'queen' occurs once in E. 



E. 

€1. . .rj ^aaikicrara ra>v fieXicr- 
(Tcov ; — Bk. III., ch. xxii., 

§99. 

' Art thou . . . the queen of 
the bees?' — v. p. 12. 



N.T. 

/3a(riXi(rcra votov eyepOqae- 
rai €v TTj Kplaei. — Matt. xii. 
42. 

* The Queen of the South 
shall rise up in the judg- 
ment.' 

Also Rev. xviii. 7, &c. 
II. yvvaiKcipiov . 

This diminutive of yvvrj is fairly common in E. 
As a rule the diminutive force can be traced, 
suggesting the idea of youth or (on the part of the 
writer) of affection. Sometimes, however, as in 
Ench. vii. — where the term is used in close associa- 
tion with iraihlov — the diminutive force seems to be 
lost. The term occurs once in N.T., where the 
diminutive force seems to be retained, suggesting 
the idea of weakness or folly : — 



E. 

TQiv KokSiv yvvaiKapiau. — 

Bk. IV., ch. i., § 86. 
' Of the pretty girls.' 
Also Bk. II., ch. xviii., 

§ 18, etc. 



N.T. 

oi. . .alxfiaXoiTiCovrfs yvvai- 
Kupia (r€(r<op€vixeva cifMapriais, 
dyoixeva ini,6vp,laii TTotKiXats. — 
2 Tim. iii. 6. 

'Who. . .take captive silly 
women, laden with sins, led 
away by various desires.' 



NOUNS. 



21 



12. So^a. 

For So^a in the N.T. sense of 'glory,' ?'. Noun 
Clauses, p. 9. There is an approach to this 
meaning in Bk. IV., ch. iv., § 42 : iav /xev eveKa 
86^7/9 avro TTotfj, ' if he do it for fame.* 

13. evae^eia. 

According to Deissmann (Bid/e Studies, p. 364) 
this, together with evae^elv and evae/Sy^;, occurs 
frequently in the Inscriptions of Asia Minor and 
appears to have been a familiar term in the religious 
language of the Imperial Period. It is found in 
Ench. xxxi., and often in N.T. in the sense of 're- 
ligion,' * piety,' * godliness.' The Adjective evcepr']^ 
occurs in Bk. II., ch. xx., § 22, Acts x. 2, &c. 



E. 

T^ff Trepi Tovs Oeovs. — Ench. 
xxxi., § I. 

Reference will be made to 
this passage again in Chapter 
ix., p. 109. 



N.T. 

bi<oK€ di diKaiocrvvrjVf evai- 
^eiav, TTio-Tiv. — I Tim. vi. II. 

* Follow after righteous- 
ness, piety, faith.' 

Also Acts iii. 12, &c. 



14. fcavcov. 

In the sense of ' rule ' this is very common in E. 
and occurs four times in St. Paul's writings : — 



cLoevai ae ovv Oft, orav (la- 
fpXV ^*^ ■'"o Oearpovf on kuvojv 
flo-epxv f«t napaSeiyp-a rols 
AXoty.— Bk. III., ch. iv., § 5. 

* It is necessary then for 
thee to know that when thou 
comest into the theatre, thou 



N.T. 

oaoi TO) Kavovi tovtco (rToi)(^r]- 
crovcriv. — Gal. vi. 16. 

' As many as shall walk 
by this rule.' 

Also 2 Cor. X. 13, 15, 16. 



22 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



comest as a rule and example 
to the others.' 

Also Bk. I., ch. xxviii., 
§§ 28, 30, etc. 



15. KOLVWVO^. 

In the sense of * partner,' * partaker,* this occurs 
once in E. and often in N.T. : — 



yovels, ahik^oi^ reKva, irar- 
ptff, arrkcos oi kolvcovoL — Bk. I., 
ch. xxii., § 10. 

' Parents, brothers, chil- 
dren, country, in short those 
who are associated with us.' 



N.T. 

Koivoivos €fi6s Kcii els vjxas 
(Tvvepyos. — 2 Cor. viii. 23. 

* My partner and fellow- 
worker for you.' 

Also Luke v. 10, 2 Pet. i. 
4, etc. 



16. KoWvpiov. 

This term for * eye-salve' occurs twice in E. and 
once in N.T. — 



E. 

ra yap KoWvpia ovk ax^prja-ra 
Tols ore tfl Koi las Set iyxpio- 
ixivois. — Bk. II., ch. xxi., § 20. 

' For eye-salves are not 
useless to those who use 
them for anointing when 
and as they must.' 



Also 
§21. 



Bk. III., ch. xxi., 



N.T. 

KoWovpLov iyxplaai tqvs 
d(p3aXixovs crov lua jSXenrjs. — 
Rev. iii. 18. 

* Eye-salve to anoint thy 
eyes that thou mayst see.' 



17. fcpd/3^aTo^, Kpd^aTTo^. 
This non-classical word, the regular N.T. term 



NOUNS. 



23 



for ' bed/ is found in E., as is also its diminutive 
Kpa^^driov, e.g. : — 



av ovv 6 7rav8oK€Vs dnoOavcov 

OTToXlTr?/ (TOt TOVS Kpo^j^UTOVS. 

— Bk. I., ch. xxiv., § 14. 

* If then the innkeeper die 
and leave thee the beds.' 

For Kpa^fiariov V. Bk. III., 
ch. xxii., § 74, &c. 



N.T. 

KUL Tjyfpdr] Koi evBvs upas 
TOP Kpa^aTTov e^rjXBfp. — Mark 
i'i. 12. 

' And he arose and imme- 
diately taking up his bed 
went out.' 

Also Acts ix. 33, &c. 



18. KTrjVO<^. 

This is found at least twice in E. and four times 
in N. T . in the sense of ' beast of burden/ ' horse ' : — 



E. 

las TCI vnobr]paTa anoyyi^ei 
TO. eaiiroO, las to kttJvos. — 
Bk. II., ch. xxii., § 31. 

'As he sponges his own 
shoes or his horse.' 

AlsoBk. III., ch. ix., § 15. 



N.T. 

ewifia^daas be avTov iivt to 
'ibiov KTqvos. . . — Luke X. 34. 

'But putting him on his 
own beast.' 

Also Acts xxiii. 24, &c. 



19. Kvvapiov, 

This diminutive of kvwv occurs at least once in 
E. and four times in N.T. : — 



fl6^ OVTiOS . . . TTpofTeXde €tt\ 
Kvpdpiov, €7ri InTrdpiov, eVi 
dypibiov. — Bk. IV., ch. i., 
§ III. 

' Then proceed thus ... to 
a dog, a horse, an estate.' 



N.T. 

Koi TO. Kvvdpia vnoKuTOi rrjs 
TpaTri^Tjs ecrBiovcnv diro toiv 
sJAix'^cov. — Mark vii. 28. 

* Even the (little) dogs 
under the table eat of the 
crumbs.* 

Also Matt. XV. 26, &c. 



24 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



20. \aXid. 

This is used in E. and N.T., not in the uncom- 
plimentary sense of * chatter,' but in that of * speech/ 
* conversation/ e.g. : — 



E. 

dvayKT) Tov crvyKaQuvra tktIv 
ennrXeou ...els XaXidv . . . — Bk. 
III., ch. xvi., § I. 

' He who frequently asso- 
ciates with others. . .in con- 
versation. . .must. . .' 



N.T. 

dXrjBcos Ku\ (TV (^ avToDV (i, 
Kcii yap Tj \aXui aov drjXou ere 
TTOul. — Matt. xxvi. 73. 

'Truly thou too art of 
them, for even thy speech 
maketh it clear that thou 
art.' 



21. fjuwy^aipa. 

This, the common N.T. term 
found in E., e.g. : — 



for * sword/ is 



E. 

in aWovs €)(ov(nv ras pd^- 
dovs Koi rovs kovtovs koL tcls 
paxaipas. — Bk. IV., ch. i., 
§88. 

' It is against others that 
they direct their fasces, their 
staves and their swords.' 



N.T. 

p€T* avrov ox}^os nn\vs pera 
paxaipStv KoX ^vKwv. — Matt, 
xxvi. 47. 

' With him a great multi- 
tude with swords and staves.' 



22. vao<;. 

This non-Attic term for ' shrine ' occurs both in 
E. and in N.T., e.g. : — 



E. 

TL ovv vaovs TTOinvpeu, ri ovv 
dyakpara . . . ; — Bk. I., ch. 
xxii., § 16. 

'Why then do we make 
shrines, why statues. . . ?' 



N.T. 

TO cr«o/xa vpo)V vao9 tov cV 
vplv dyiov nvevpaTos ecrTiv. — 
I Cor. vi, 19. 

' Your body is a shrine of 
the Holy Spirit who is in 
you.' 



NOUNS. 



25 



23. ofcVo5eo-7roT?;9. 

This non-classical term for ' householder,' which 
is common in N.T., occurs in E. : — 



(Referring to God). 

(an yap tls koX ivBaK oIko- 
deaTToTTjs eKuara [6] diarda-croiP. 
— Bk. III., ch. xxii., §4. 

' For here too is a master 
of the house who orders 
everything.' 

Also Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 
§99- 



N.T. 

6i lJ8(i o olKo8ean6rr]s tvo'm 
oipa. . . — Luke xii. 39. 

* If the householder had 
known at what hour . . . ' 

Also Matt. xiii. 27, &c. 



24. oucovofjbia. 

This is found in Plato, Xenophon, and Aristotle, 
and also in Luke xvi. 2, 3, 4, in the literal sense of 
* stewardship,' * household management ' ; it is used 
in E. and St. Paul's writings in the metaphorical 
sense of ' arrangement,' ' management,' ' dispensa- 
tion,' e.g. : — 



E. 

(The term is associated 
with ?iiniKr](ris to describe the 
production of raisins from 
grapes, a change that is) re- 
rayfievrj tis olKovofiia Ka\ hun- 
KJ]m9. — Bk. III., ch. xxiv,, 
§92- 

'A certain appointed ar- 
rangement and administra- 
tion.' 



N.T. 

61 yf rJKOvcraTe rrjv oiKovn- 
fiiav rrfs x^P'-'''^^ ''"ot' Qfov. — 
Eph. iii. 2. 

' If at any rate you have 
heard of the dispensation of 
the grace of God.' 

SiaKovos Kara rfjs olKovojxiav 
Tov Qeov. — Col. i. 25. 

'A minister according to 
the dispensation ' (or * ar- 
rangement ') ' of God.' 



26 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

25. TTaL^aycoyo^, 

This classical term * tutor ' for the slave who took 
the children to school occurs in E. and in St. Paul's 
writings, e.g. : — 



E. 

aXK e^eracrov fxi] , . . cl . . . 
ofiov auareBpa^jJiivoi kol vtto 
rw avT<M 7rai8aya)y«. — Bk. II., 
ch. xxii., § 26. 

' But inquire not. . .whether 
. . . they have been brought 
up together and under the j iii. 25 
same tutor.' ! 



N.T. 

6 v6[xos naibayoiyos i]^Qiv 
ytyovfv els Xpiarov. — Gal. iii. 
24. 

' The law has become our 
tutor unto Christ.' 

Also I Cor. iv. 15 ; Gal. 



26. Trrjpi^Lov. 

The diminutive of injpa occurs twice in E. but 
not in N.T. In the latter, however, irrjpa is found. 
Deissmann (IVew Lights pp. 41-44) suggests that 
whenever it is found in N.T. irr^pa means not, as 
had been supposed, ' bread-bag ' or * travelling-bag,' 
but ' collecting-bag ' used by a beggar. The reason 
for the suggestion, we are told, is that the term is 
so used in * a Greek inscription of the Roman 
period . . . discovered at Kefr-Hauar in Syria, in 
which a " slave " of the " Syrian goddess " speaks of 
the begging expeditions he has undertaken for the 
"Lady."' 

That E.'s use of Trripl^LoVy in close connexion 
with alrecv, tends to support Deissmann's sugges- 
tion, may be seen from a comparison of the 
following passages : — 



NOUNS. 



27 



E. 

nqpldiov npoaXrfyjrofiai Koi 
^ v\o u Koi Treptepx.'^ixevos 
alrelv up^opaL rovs dnav- 
TMVTas. — Bk. III., ch. xxii., 
§ 10. 

' I shall take a wallet and 
staff and begin to go about 
begging from those who meet 
with me.' 

Also TTTjpibiov KoX ^v\ov Ka\ 
yudOoi fieydXat. — Bk. III., ch. 
xxii., § 50. 

' Wallet and staff and great 
jaws ' (of the Cynic). 



N.T. 

fifj KTr]crr)ade ;^puo-oi/ p,r]be 
apyvpov prjSi x^Xkov (Is ras 
^wvas vficiiv, fxf] nrjpav els odou 
...p.r]8e p a /3 So I/.— Matt. X. 
9, 10. 

'Get not gold nor silver 
nor brass for your girdles, 
nor a wallet for the way. . . 
nor a staff.' 

fxrj /SaoTTci^ere ^aXXdirnop^ prj 
7rr]pav. — Luke x. 4. 

^ Carry not a purse, nor a 
wallet.' 

Also Luke ix. 3, &c. 



yvaOoL fieyaXaL supports this idea of Trripa (or 
Trrjpl^iov), as suggested by Deissmann. 

Further support for the idea may be found in the 
fact that while E. speaks of ^v\ov, N.T. in Matt. x. 
10, Mark vi. 8, Luke ix. 3, speaks of pd^SoVy 
suggesting that a staff was a regular accompani- 
ment on a begging expedition. 

27. irvevfjua. 

This term, lit. ' spirit,' is used in two senses 
common to E. and N.T. 

a. It is used in the sense of * faculty,' * power ' : — 
E. 

eiKii ovv (TOL 6 Ofos ocpdaX- 
fxovs edcoKev, (Ikjj 7rv€vp.a evcKe- 
paaev avrols ovrcos laxvpou koL 
(piXoTcx^oVy (oare fiuKpdv i^t- 
Kvovpeuov dvap,da(Te(rdaL rovs 
Tvnovs Ta>v opcofxdvcov ; — Bk. 
II., ch. xxiii., § 3. • 



N.T. 

The anarthrous npfvpa 
dyiov is common in the 
sense of a ' faculty,' ' power ' 
or * influence ' from the Holy 
Spirit, e.g. :— 

avTos Se ^aTTTLO-ei vp,ds nvev- 
fiart ay 1(0. — Mark i. 8. 



28 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
* Is it in vain then that 
God gave thee eyes, is it in 
vain that He infused them 
with a spirit so strong and 
active that it can represent 
the forms of distant ob- 
jects ? ' 



N.T. 

* He shall baptize you with 
Holy Spirit.' 

eav ^rj ris yfvvrjdr/ e^ vbaros 
Koi rrvfVfiaTos.— John iii. 8. 

' Unless a man shall have 
been born of water and 
spirit.' 



13. It is used in the sense of * mind.' 



E. 

(The terms '^vxrj and 
TTvevfxa are used in a para- 
graph referring to the same 
object, in the sense of ' soul ' 
or * mind.' After comparing 
the yfrvxri to a vessel of water 
and appearances of things 
to a ray falling on its sur- 
face, E. continues :) orav 
Toivvv rrKOTOuBfj tis, ovx «* 
Tex^fti Koi at diicrai crvyx^ov- 
rat, alsXa to irvevfia ecf)' ov 
flat. — Bk. III., ch. iii., § 22. 

'Whenever anyone there- 
fore becomes dizzy, it is not 
the arts and the virtues that 
are confounded, but the mind 
in which they are.' 



N.T. 

(vBvs imyvovs 6 ^\r](Tovs ro) 
TTvev^aTi avTov. — Mark ii. 8. 

' Jesus immediately per- 
ceiving in His spirit.' 

(Here apparently vol 
' mind ' would express the 
same meaning : voi too is 
sometimes a variant for 
yj^vxf}.) 

Perhaps also the sense of 
' mind ' occurs in — 

ravra elnwvy 'ir/o-ou? eVa- 
pax^r} Tw TTvev/xaTi. — John xiii. 
21. 

' Having said this, Jesus 
became troubled in His 
spirit.' 



28. TTpOKOinj. 

This term, which is not employed by any author 
earlier than the 3rd century B.C., occurs in E. and 
N.T. in the sense of ' progress,' ' improvement,' 
e.g. :— 



NOUNS. 



29 



del yap irpos o av r] TeXciorrjs 
Tivos KaOdna^ "y?7> rrpos avro 
1) npoKOTrfj (rvveyyia-fxas eVrt. 
— Bk. I., ch. iv., § 4. 

' For to whatever point 
perfection of anything abso- 
lutely brings one, improve- 
ment is always an approach 
to it.' 



N.T. 

ravra fxeXera, iv tovtois ia$i, 
iva (Tov rj TTpoKoirrj (f)av€pa jj 
TrdaLp. — I Tim. iv. 15. 

' In these things be dili- 
gent, be in them, that thy 
improvement may be mani- 
fest to all.' 



29. TTpoaeoTTov. 

This term is very common in E. and N.T. In 
E. it denotes 'character' (real or assumed) or 

* part ' played, the development of this idea being 
seen in the use of the term by Sabellius to express 
his conception of each of the Three Persons in the 
Godhead. In N.T. however (apart from its use in 
the literal sense of ' face '), it has a different shade 
of meaning in a metaphorical sense : viz. that of 

* person,' i.e. ' outward appearance ' as opposed to 
'reality,' ' genuine worth,' 'character' {in the true 
sense). We may make comparisons : — 



E. 

ovKeTL (rdxrfi to tov koXov 
Koi dyaOov irpocrcoTrov. — Bk. 
III., ch. xxii., § 69. 

' He will no longer pre- 
serve the character of a 
noble and good man.' 

What will happen to the 
Cynic if he is disloyal to 
God : here tt. means ' real 
character.' # 



N.T. 

ov yap /SXcTrety els TrpoacoTrou 
dvOpiOTroiv. — Matt. xxii. 16. 

' For Thou regardest not 
the person of men.' 

Also— 

dno de tS>v hoKovvTa>v eivai 
Ti — OTTolol TTOTe TjCTav ovbev poi 
diacfiepei — irp6(Ta>Trov [o] Geo? 
dv6po)iTuv ov \ap.^dv€L. — Gal. 
ii. 6. 



30 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



N.T. 
' But from those who are 
reputed to be something — 
what they once were maketh 
no matter to me — man's per- 
son God recciveth not.' 



E. 
Also for 'character as- 
sumed ' — 

viTOKf}LTr]S ei dpdfxaros . . . 
crou yap roCr' eari, to doOiv 
VTTOKpLvao-Oat TrpoacoTTov KaXcos. 
— Ench. xvii. 

' Thou art an actor in a 
drama ... It is thy part to 
act well the character given 
thee.' 



30. TTpo<^r)Tr}(;. 

This familiar N.T. term is found in close asso- 
ciation with lepev^ in one passage in E. : — 

l€p€i<; Kad tarda cv avTov<; koX 7rpo(j)'r]ra<;. — Bk. II., 
ch. XX., § 27. ' They appoint themselves priests and 
prophets.' 

It is interesting to note that Deissmann shows 
(Bzd/e Studies, p. 235 f.) that in the 2nd century 
A.D. in Egypt some of the priests were known as 
irpoipriTaL. Conversely in the history of the Church 
the * prophets ' of the early times became in later 
times regarded as 'priests.' 

31. aroix^la. 

This word is used in E. and N.T. to denote 
'elements' in two senses, physical and intellectual. 

a. In the physical sense the reference is to the 
* four elements ' : — 



E. 

aVTU Til TtTTUpa (TTOlXfia. 

uv(t> Koi KUTOi Tpenerai koI 
^erajSaXXet koi yfj re vda>p 



N.T. 

01 ovpavoi . . . <rrot;^f ta 8e 
Kavaovfifva \v6i]areTai koi y^ 
Koi TO. iv avTT] epya . . . ovpavoi 



NOUNS. 



31 



N. 



ar)p 



yiuerai /tai v 
Frag. Diss. 8. 

*The four elements them- 
selves are transformed and 
changed up and down, and 
earth becomes water and 
water air. . . ' 



N.T. 

TTVpOVfJLeUOL \vdr](TOVTaL Koi 

orroi;(eTa Kavcrov/Jicva rqKeToi. 
— 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12. 

' The heavens . . . and the 
elements shall be dissolved 
with fervent heat, and the 
earth and the works that 
are in it . . . the heavens 
being on fire shall be dis- 
solved and the elements 
shall melt with fervent heat.' 



Even if we adopt the suggestion of R.V. mg. 
and Strachan {Expos. Gk. Test., Vol. V., p. 145) 
that in 2 Pet. iii. 10-12 aToixela denotes the sun, 
moon and stars, the term is still used in a physical 
sense. 

yS. In the intellectual sense the term is found at 
least once in E. and five times in N.T. to denote 
' elements ' or ' rudiments ' to be taught : — 



a Zi]vu)V X^yei, yvoovai ra 
Tov Xoyov aroi^ela. — Bk. IV., 
ch. viii., § 12. 

'As Zeno says, to know 
the elements of reason,' 



N.T. 

ore rjfxev vrjTrioi, vno to. 
cTToi^e^a TOV Koafiov TJixeOa 
de^ovKciip,epoi. — Gal. iv. 3. 

' When we were children 
we were in a state of slavery 
under the elements of the 
world.' 

Also Heb. V. 12 ; Gal. iv. 
9 ; Col. ii. 8, 20. 



32. (TXW(^. 

The meaning ' fashion ' as opposed to ' form 
i/xopcj}}]), common in^N.T., is found once in E. : — 



32 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. I 

TrapaKeKadiKe (rot crTpaTi6iTT]s 

epax^jjLaTL tSiwrifcw. — Bk. IV., 

ch. xiii., § 5. 

' A soldier in civilian dress 

has taken a seat by thee.' 



N.T. 



Kai 
(iudpcoTTos. — Phil. ii. 7. 



in 



' And being found 
fashion as a man.' 

Also I Cor. vii. 31 (and 
I for the verb) Rom. xii. 2. 

There is however one passage in E. in which 
fjLopcjiij seems to have no stronger sense than that 
given to axni^cu. This being so, we believe that 
we can find two parallels in N.T. : — 



E. 

rl ovv eXeyfy, on avOpanos 
fan ; ixr] yap €K ylAiXrjs /Jiopcprjs 
KpiperaL rcov ovTOiv eKaarov ; 
inel ovTO) Xeye Koi to Krjpivop 
fxriXov eivai. <al 6dp.T)v i^eiv 
avTO Sfi KOI yevcriu ' ovk lipKel 
rj €Kt6s Tre pLypa(f)T]. — Bk. IV., 
ch. v., §§ 19, 20. 

'What then wast thou 
saying, that he is a man? 
Why, is each of the things 
that exist distinguished by 
the mere form? Then say 
just as well that the piece of 
wax is an apple. Yes, but 
it must have scent and taste 
too : the external figure is 
not enough.' 

In this passage p-op<l>ri is 
evidently equivalent to ttc- 
piypa(l)i). 



N.T. 

hvaiv i^ avTfov TrcpiTrarovariv 
ecPavepcoBr] iv irepa iMop<pfj. — 
Mark xvi. [12]. 

'To two of them as they 
were walking He was mani- 
fested in another form.' 

Lightfoot admits that /xop- 
(f)rj ' here has no peculiar 
force,' but suggests that 
(Txw^ '^^s avoided 'as it 
might imply an illusion or 
an imposture' {Epis. to the 
Phil., p. 131). 

Its use in E. encourages 
us to say that here pop<pTj 
= o'XVH'^i' 

(Also p.6pcf)aicris in) — 

exoures p.6p<f>(j>(riv eixre^eias 
Tr)v de bvvap.LV avrrjs r]pvT]p.€vai. 
— 2 Tim. iii. 5. 

' Having a form of godli- 
ness but having denied its 
power.' 

Lightfoot, in seeking to 



NOUNS. 



33 



N.T. 
show why St. Paul, instead 
of using (Txw^ to describe 
that which was superficial 
and unreal, yet avoids fiopcfyr] 
and uses fi6p(f)co(Tis^ states 
that the termination -axns 
'denotes the aiming after 
or affecting the P'Op(^r) ' 
{Epis. to Phil.,^. 131). But 
with this statement Sanday 
and Headlam disagree {Ro- 
mans^ p. 66). 

Here again — and E. en- 
courages us — we cannot 
distinguish fxopcfiuiais from 



33. T€\covrj<;. 

This common Synoptic term is found at least 
twice in E. in the same sense of 'tax-gatherer' as 
in N.T. :— 



E. 

fxfj cds TCI Tracdia vvv /tei/ 
(f)ik6(TO(})os, varepov be reXcovrjs, 
fira pr)TU)p. — Bk. III., ch. xv., 
§ 12. 

' Do not as the little children 
be now a philosopher, after- 
wards a tax-gatherer, then an 
ora,tor.' 

Similarly Ench. xxix., § 7. 



N.T. 

ovxi. KOI oi Te\a>vai to avTO 
TTOLovartv ; — Matt. v. 46. 

' Do not even the tax- 
gatherers the same ? ' 

Also Mark ii. 15, Luke iii. 
12, &c. 



34. xa/oa/CT?;/). 

Its use in E. for th* ' stamp ' or ' image ' on a coin 

D 



34 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



may be paralleled with the similar use of eUoiv in 
N.T. :— 

E. 



TIVOS €)(€l TO!/ X^P^'^'^VP"^ 



Tovro TO rerpaaaapov ; 
'iavov. — Bk. IV., ch. v., \ 
' Whose image has 
sesterce .? Trajan's.' 



Tpa- 

17. 
this 



N.T. 

Set^arc /uoi b-qvapiov ' Tivos 
e^ft elKoua Koi emypacfirjv ; 01 
de eimw Kaiaapos. — Luke xx. 
24. 

' " Show Me a denarius : 
whose image and superscrip- 
tion has it?" They said, 
" Caesar's." ' 

Also Matt. xxii. 20, Mark 
j xii. 16. 

With these instances we may compare a develop- 
ment of the use of x^P^'^'^Vp i" N.T. — 09 uiv . . . 
XcipaKTyp tt}? vTrocrrdaecof; avrov — Heb. i. 3, ' Who 
being . . . the expression of His essence ' (Westcott : 
Hebrews, p. 12). As this is the only N.T. example 
of the use of the word there is nothing in N.T. to 
correspond to its use in E. in the sense of 
* character,' * characteristic ' : Ench. xxxiii., § i ; 
xlviii., § I. 

35. '>^vxn^ 

This term in the plural is once used in E. in the 
sense of ' persons,' * individuals,' a sense which it 
sometimes has in N.T. : — 



E. 

uTonov yap oXiyais a-Ti^da-i 
TToXkas 8ov\cveiv yJAv^ds. — 
Stob. 23. 

' For it is absurd that many 
persons should wait on a few 
chairs (at meals).' 



N.T. 

fjixfda be at rrdaai ^v\ai 
iv T(o n\oi(o las e^dofiTjKovra e^, 
— Acts xxvii. 37. 

* Now we were in all in the 
ship seventy-six souls.' 

Also Acts ii. 41, iii. 23, vii. 
14. 



NOUNS. 35 

In Acts vli. 14 — a quotation from Deut. x. 22 — 
iv ylrvxct'if; i^SofjbTjKovra irivje agrees with LXX. 
and also with the Hebrew ^9? ; but in Acts iii. 23 
— a quotation from Deut. xviii. 19 — '>^vxn does not 
agree with LXX., nor is it represented by ^9? in 
the Hebrew text. 

The use of -^vxr) then, from the evidence of the 
New Testament itself as well as from that of 
Epictetus, is shown to be in no sense a ' Hebraism.' 
Rather the term for ^soul' was used in both 
Hebrew and Greek in the sense of ' person ' or 
* individual.* 



D 2 



CHAPTER III. 
Pronouns (including the Article). 

I. Reflexives. 

In the plural the 3rd person forms are used for 
those of the ist and 2nd persons in E. and N.T., 
e.g.: 

a. 3rd person for 1st person : — 

E. I N.T. 

els rlva Se x^P^^ avrovs i ov yap iavTovs KTjpvaaonev. 

KaTardaaofxev ; — Bk. II. , ch. I — 2 Cor. iv. 5. 

iv., § 3. ! ' For we preach not our- 

' In what rank do we place j selves.' 
ourselves ? ' | 

yS. 3rd person for 2nd person : — 
E. 



Trjp€LT€ OVTOiS CaVTOVS eP OLS 

c7rpd(Ta€T€. — Bk. II., ch. xix., 
§ 20. 

' Observe yourselves thus 
in your actions.' 



N.T. 

\oyi^€a$€ iavTovs iivai ve- 
Kpovs p.iv TTj apxipria. — Rom. 
vi. II. 

* Reckon yourselves to be 
dead unto sin.' 



7. We must also note that in at least three places 
in E. the 3rd person singular eavrov is used for the 
2nd person. There are two examples of this in 
N.T., one having come down to us in the best texts 
and two in inferior texts (Rom. xiii. 9 and Gal. v. 
14): according to Moulton (Pro/eg., p. Sj), Mate 

36 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 37 

scribes, reflecting the developments of their own 
time, have introduced it.' We append examples : — 



E. 
firjBenoTe e'lTrps avros TTpos 
iavrov... — Ench. xxxiii., § 13. 
Never say to thyself.' 
Xf'ye avTos npos iavrov . . . 
— Ench. xlix. 
' Say to thyself.' 
Also Bk. IV., ch. iii., § 11. 



N.T. 

d<^' eavTov trv tovto Xc'yety 
. . . ;— John xviii. 34. 

' Sayest thou this of thy- 
self.?' 

(W. H. reads a7r6 o-eavrov.) 

dya7rr](reii rbv liK-qcriov trov 
bis iavTov. — Rom. xiii. 9. 

' Thou shalt love thy neigh- 
bour as thyself.' 

(Sanday and Headlam — 
Romans^ p. 374 — quote the 
passage in this way ; W. H. 
reads cos acavTov.) 



On the strength of the above passages in E., 
added to the fact that the usage occurs once in 
Lucian (Moulton, Proleg., p. Zj, footnote), one is 
inclined to ask whether, after all, the above examples 
in N.T. — or, at any rate, that in John xviii. 34 — 
may not be genuine. 



h. The use of iavrov in an indefinite sense in 
I Cor. X. 29 — (TvveiBrjariv Be Xeyco ov')(l rrjv iavrov 
aXXa rrjv rov irepov, ' not one's own conscience, I 
mean, but that of the other man ' — may be paral- 
leled from Ench. xxxiii., § 14 : iv raU o/jbiXiaL^ 
aTrecTft) rb iavrov rtvcov epycov r) kivBvvcov eVt rroXv 
Kal afi6rp(o<; /ubefivrjaOat. ' In conversations let there 
be absent the frequent and excessive mention of 
one's own deeds and dangers.' 



38 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

2. ov6el<;. 

This occurs in place of ovSet<; in E. and N.T., 
e.g.: 

a. In the masculine : — 



E. 

Koi TovTo ov6e\s KwXvcrei. — 
Ench. xxxii., § 2. 

* It will be in thy power to 
make a good use of it and 
this no one will prevent.' 



N.T. 

Koi Trapiov npos vpns Kai 
voTeprjOds ov KaT€vdpKr]aa ov- 
Bevos. — 2 Cor. xi, 9. 

' And when I was present 
with you and came to be in 
want I did not become a 
burden on anyone.' 



y8. The neuter occurs in N.T., e.g. : — 

Kav eyca . . . ayaTrrjv ^e fjur) €^(0^ ovOev eljjui. * And 

if I have . . . but have not love, I am nothing.' 
We have, however, failed to find an instance 

in E. 



3. cKelvo^. 

Apart from the sense of ' that one (yonder) 
there are two usages in E. and N.T. : — 

a. With emphatic force, e.g. : — 



E. 
(f)iXos €(ro/iai Kaia-apos' ckci- 

VOV fl€ OVTCl fToipoV ovbcls «8t- 

Kf)(Tj6i.—Bk. IV., ch. i., § 95. 

' I will be Caesar's friend ; 
no one will do me wrong if I 
am /lis comrade.' 



N.T. 

Kill (Kiivos oibev oTi akrjBrj 
\eyei. — John xix. 35. 

'And ke^ (i.e. /esus pro- 
bably) 'knows that he speaks 
the truth.' 

Also John i. 8, &c. 



13. It is used in the neuter referring to something 
that will be mentioned, e.g. : — 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 39 



Tipos dnoXfiTrr) rav €kt6s, t'l 
avT avTov irfpnroi^. — Bk. IV., 
ch. iii., § I. 

' Whenever you lose any- 
anything external, have this 
ready, what you get in place 
of it.' 



N.T. 
cKelvo de yiva)aK€T€ otl et 

r}h€l 6 OlKobeaTTOTTJS TTOia (f)V- 

\aK^ 6 KkeiTTrjs ep^eTai, eyprjyo- 
prja-ev au. — Matt. xxiv. 43. 

'But be assured of this, 
that, if the householder had 
known at what watch the 
thief was coming, he would 
have been awake.' 



4. 09 as Demonstrative. 

This occurs in Attic in the Platonic phrase tj S* 09, 
* said he ' : Plato also uses the term in the opening 
words of a sentence, koX 09, e.g. : — 

Kol 09 cLKovcra^ iyeXaaev, ' and he laughed when 
he heard.' — Phaedo 84 D. 

The latter phrase is found in E. ; with it may be 
compared the common N.T. usage of 09 fteV ... 09 
Be, 'one. . .another,' e.g. : — 

N.T. 
« peu edojKfv nevTe raXavra, 
a de dvoj <o 8e ev. — Matt. XXV. 

15- 

' To one he gave five talents, 
to another two, and to another 



E. 



-Bk. I., 



K (u o s Tivarponov 
ch. i., § 3. 

'And he (said) : how is 
this?' 



5. Confusion of Relatives and Interrogatives. 

There are instances in E. of Relatives being used 
where we should expect Interrogatives and vice 
versa. There is something similar to this in N.T. 

a. Interrogative employed as Relative. 

In E. there is one clear instance of this (repeated 



40 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

twice) : there are also a few probable instances. 
In N.T. there is one clear instance : there is also 
one probable instance. 



(i.) The clear instances are the following : — 



N.T. 

ov t'l iya> 6eXa>j aWa r'l av. 
— Mark xiv. 36. 

' Not what I will, but what 
Thou wilt.' 



E. 

eyw 5' ^X^' '^'■^^ H'^ ^^^ apea- 
KfiVf Tivc vrroreTax^ciiy rivi 
TTfiSco-dai' rS ^em. — Bk. IV., 
ch. xii., § II. 

'But I have one whom I 
must please, to whom I must 
be subject, whom I must 
obey : God.' 



(2.) In the instances which we call ' probable ' we 
can at any rate perceive the transition from the 
Interrogative to the Relative sense. 

There are at least two such instances in E. and 
one in N.T. We append them : — 



E. 

iiKourrov avTov, riva Xe'yfi. — 
Bk. III., ch. xxiii., § 17. 

' Hear him, what he says.' 

aKovaov avTOv KanrfpiTovTcov 
TL Xe'yft.— Bk. IV., ch. i., § 48. 

' Hear him, what he says 
about these things also.' 

We notice the use of the 
verb aKovd) in both instances. 



N.T. 

Luke xvii. 8. 

' Make ready wherewith I 
may sup.' 

In support of our conten- ' 
tion we may mention that the 
Vulgate treats ri as a Rela- 
tive (as it does in Mark xiv. 
36): 

' Para quod coenem.' 



yS. Relative employed as Interrogative. 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 41 

(i.) Indirect questions, 

olo^ is used at least once in E. and once in 
N.T. :— 

N.T. 

vfuv di' vfius. — I Thess. i. 5. 

' Even as you know what 
kind of men we showed our- 
selves toward you for your, 
sakes.' 



E. 

Koi f] 7rpo(r7roir](Tis Spa 5t' 
oLoov av yivoiTO. — Bk. IV., ch. 
vi., § 4. 

' Observe too by what 
means the pretence would be 
carried on.' 



There are also two clear instances and one 
possible instance of 09 being used in this way in E. 
But this use cannot be paralleled from N.T. 

We append the two clear instances : — 

^PXh ^i^O(TO(^ia^ . . .^rjr7)cri<; rod irap' o ylveTai r) 
fidXV' • • — Bk. II., ch. xi., § 13. ' The beginning of 
philosophy is ... an inquiry into the cause of the 
disagreement. . .' ti<; yap aya06<; icrrvv ovk etSo)? 
09 ecTTt ; — Bk. III., ch. xxiv., § 20. * For who is a 
good man without knowing what he is ? ' 

The possible instance — where at any rate we can 
see the transition from the Relative to the Inter- 
rogative sense — is as follows : — 

(rt fie hel iroietv (TKiy^rat . . . ) a hel fjie iroielv ovk 
olha.—Bk. II., ch. xv., §§ 15, 16. '(What I must 
do, consider ;. . .) what I must do, I know not.' 

(2.) Direct Questions. 

There are two instances in E. of ©109 being used 
in this way : — 

TO, he TTTTjva javra orav \7j(j)0fj koI iyfccKXeifieva 
TpecpqTat, oia irdai^eL ^rjTovvTa eK^vyelv ; . . . ola 



42 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

Xeyei^ ;— Bk. IV., ch. i., §§ 26, 28. * But as to these 
birds, when they have been caught and are being 
reared in confinement, what do they suffer by 
trying to escape ? . . . What dost thou say ? ' 

There is, perhaps, a parallel to these instances in 
the use of 09 in a well-known passage in N.T. We 
refer to Matt. xxvi. 50 : e</)' o Trdpei, which R.V. 
translates, ' Do that for which thou art come.' 
But there seems to be force in Bruce's objection to 
this that Judas had already done so — in giving the 
kiss. (Expos. Gk. Test., Vol. I., p. 316.) 

On the other hand the sentence is often taken as 
a question. The familiar A. V. rendering, following 
the T.R. e<^' w — which, however, cannot differ 
materially in meaning from e</)' 5 — is 'Wherefore 
art thou come .'* ' Luther, following the T.R. 
reading, translates similarly * Warum bist du 
gekommen } ' Also, as Bruce reminds us in the 
passage already mentioned, the Vulgate and 
Weizsiicker treat the sentence in a similar way, the 
former translating it, * Ad quid venisti 1 ' the latter 
•Wozu bist du da?' 

It is not usual for one to-day to urge an A.V. 
rendering in preference to that which corresponds 
to it in R.V. But in this instance, when we con- 
sider that in E. olo<; is used as a Direct Interrogative 
and 09 as an Indirect Interrogative, and moreover 
that Luther, the Vulgate and Weizsacker treat 5 
as if it were t/, we surely have a strong case for the 
A.V. rendering ; and, really, the meaning thus given 
seems very natural. 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 43 



6. Omission of Pronoun. 

A Pronoun, such as at-To? or rt? — or perhaps a 
Noun, such as dvOp(07ro<; — is sometimes omitted 
when it is the subject of a verb in a sentence or is 
in the Genitive Absolute ; we give instances. 

a. As subject of a verb, e.g. : — 

E. 



tiXX' epovai • Tru6eu rj^lv ovtos 
o(f)pvv €vf)vn)(^€v ; — Bk. II., ch. 
viii., § 24. 

* But they ' — or ' men ' — 
* will say : " Whence, we 
ask, his supercilious look ? " ' 

AlsoBk.IV.,ch.i.,§9i,&c. 



N.T. 

ov8e KaiovcriP Xvx^ov Kin 
TLBeaariv avrov VTVo tov fio^iov 
dXX' 67ri Trjv Xvxviav. — Matt. 
V. 15. 

* Nor do they' — or 'men' — 
' light a lamp and put it under 
the bushel but on the stand.' 



13. In the Genitive Absolute. 

According to Moulton (Pro/eg:, p. 74) this is 
frequent in papyri but rare in N.T. There is at 
least one instance in E. : — 



E. 

(tov 8' eTTiTpOTTOV Tr]S 'HTrei- 
pov aKooTfioTepov anovdao-avTos 
KcopabS Tivi Ka\ iivl tovtco 8r)- 
fioaia Xoi8opr]BtvTos), eiVa €^1]^ 
aTrayyeiXaj/rov npos avrov, 
OTL eXoidoprjOr], Kui ayavaK- 
TovvTos npos Tovs Xoidoprj- 
o-avras. — Bk. III., ch. iv., § i. 

' (When the Governor of 
Epirus had exerted himself 
somewhat inappropriately in 
favour of a certain comedian, 
and was, on that account 
publicly railed at), and then, 
when someone afterwards 



N.T. 

KCU iXvOVTOiV TTpOS TOV 0)(\oV 

npofrfjXBev avTM avBpaynos yovv- 
Treroiv avTov. . . — Matt. xvii. 
14. 

' And when they had come 
to the multitude there came 
to Him a man kneeling to 
Him...' 

This example is mentioned 
by Moulton, and also Acts 
xxi. 31. 



44 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

informed him that he was 
railed at, and he was vexed 
with those who railed at 
him...' 



7. There is at least one instance in E. of a 
Pronoun being omitted after wo-re followed by the 
Infinitive. There are two examples in N.T. which, 
however, are not closely parallel to that in E. The 
instances are the following : — 



E. 

eJra (TKCvdpinp fxiv el ^s 
ovToi cranpop, axrve croi Tr^io? 
fiT]8iv 8vvaaOai ;^p^o-^at . . . — 
Bk. II., ch. iv., §4. 

'Then if thou wert so 
sorry a vessel, that no one 
could use thee.' 



N.T. 

eScoKev avTols e^ovaiav nv^v- 
fiiiTcou iiKaBapTCdv cocrre eV/SaX- 
Xetv avrd. — Matt. X. I. 

* He gave them authority 
over unclean spirits so as to 
cast them out.' 

a>a-T€ iTnn'iTvreiv avr^ iva 
avTov a\|/'(Bt'rai ocroc ei^ov 
patrTiyas. — Mark iii. 10. 

' So that there were press- 
ing on Him to touch Him as 
many as had plagues.' 



B. There is at least one instance in E. of the 
Pronoun as Object of the Verb being omitted, but 
there seems to be nothing corresponding to this in 
N.T. The instance is in Bk. III., ch. xxiii., § 7 : — 
€v6v<; oLKovei^ Xe'yovjo^ . . .' Immediately thou hearest 
one saying. . .' 

7. Omission of the Article. 

a. With Possessives (used attributively). 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 45 



At least two instances occur in E. and one 



in N.T. 



E. 



&)$■ eXcvdepos, o)? vTrrjpeTrjs 
aos... — Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 
§98. 

' As free, as thy servant.' 
Also 8ov\os €fi6s. — Bk. III., 
ch. xxiv., § 75. 



N.T. 
efiop ^pS>ixd eVrti/ tva Trotr/crft) 
, . — John iv. 34. 
' My food is to do ... ' 



/3. With Demonstratives. 

This is so both in E. and N.T. in the case of 
ovTo^i, TifKiKovTo^, TotouTo? and ToaovTO^, e.g. : — 



(l.) 0UT09. 
E. 

uphpanoha ravra ovk oldfP 
...— Bk. IV., ch. v., § 24. 

' These wretches do not 
know. . . ' 

(2.) rrfKiKovTOf;. 
E. 

rl 8c KoX Xv^VOV aTTTCLS KOI 

TTOi/ft? VTvep Tjp.av Koi TrjkiKavra 
^i^Xla ypdcfieis ; — Bk. I., ch. 
XX., § 19. 

*And why dost thou light 
a lamp and labour for us 
and write so many books ? ' 

(3.) TOLOVTO<;. 

E. 

TjfXUS TOVTO fXOVOV r}fldpTOIl€Vf 

OTL ToiovTov KaTaaKOTTov eVe/t- 
nofiiv. — Bk. I., ch. xxiv^, ^5. 



N.T. 

avTr} (iTToypacfirj irpdrrj eye- 
j/cro — — Luke ii. 2. 

' This enrolment was first 
made . . . ' 



N.T. 

TTcos r//iel? €Kcf)€V^6iJ,€6a njXi- 
KavTTjs dp.eXT}(ravT€5 ao>Tr)pLas ; 
— Heb. ii. 3. 

' How shall we escape if 
we neglect so great salva- 
tion ? ' 



N.T. 

01 o)(XoL . . . edu^aaav top Qeop 
TOP 86pTa e^ovaiap Toiavrrjp 
Tols dvdpoiTvois. — Matt. ix. 8. 



46 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
' Our only fault was this, 
that we were sending such 
a spy.' 

(4.) 7oaovTO<;. 
E. 

dXX' (K ToaovTov ;(/Joi/ov 
fnibqfiiov uyvoel tovs vofiovs 
rrjs TToXfcoy ... — Bk. II., ch. 
xiii., § 6. 

' But though he has lived 
here so long he is ignorant 
of the laws of the State. . . ' 



N.T. 

' The multitudes . . . glori- 
fied God who had given such 
authority to men.' 



N.T. 

Trap' ov8€v\ TO(TavTr]v TrtVrij/ 
eV TW 'icrpo^X evpov. — Matt, 
viii. 10. 

'With no one in Israel 
have I found so great faith.' 

Also, for use with xp^^^^ 
John xiv. 9, &c. 



7. With Nouns. 

This is common both in E. and N.T. in the case 
of terms such as /troV/io? denoting the only one of a 
class and in the case of olKo<i in the sense of ' home.' 



(i.) Terms .such as Koafiof^. 
E. 

ii^iov . . . rjfMiis . . . 7rvv6dvea6ai 

. . .Tl KpariCTTOU i(TTLV iv KOO-fKO 

...— Bk. III., ch.vii., § I. 

' It is fitting. . .that we. . . 
should inquire what is the 
most valuable thing in the 
world.' 

Koi yi} Koi OiiXaaarn Kiii 
rjXioi. . . — Frag. Diss. 3. 

' Both earth and sea and 
sun.' 

crv ijKios ei.— Bk. III., ch. 
xxii., § 5. 

' Thou art the sun.' 



N.T. 

T) cTrayyeXia rt5 'A/3paa/i. . . 
TO KkrjpovopLOV avTov eivai Koir- 
fiov. — Rom. iv. 13. 

' The promise to Abraham 
. . .that he should be heir of 
the world.' 

6)9 eV oupavS Koi eirl yrj<i. — 
Matt. vi. 10. 

'As in heaven so also 
upon earth.' 

eaovrai ar^pda iv rjKlto Kiii 
afXfivrj. . . — Luke xxi. 25. 

' There shall be signs in 
sun and moon.' 



PRONOUNS (INCLUDING THE ARTICLE). 47 



(2.) oIko<;. 
E. 

irapeKuOvTo. . . — Bk. IL, ch. 
xvi., § 44. 

' If Heracles had remained 
sitting with those at home.' 

(p^€Tat fls OLKOV. — Bk. I., 

ch. xix., § 24. 

' He comes home.' 

OTL (TOt €^ OLKOV (jiepeTClt 

ovbev. — Bk. II., ch. xxi,, § 12. 
* Because nothing is 
brought thee from home.' 



N.T. 

ft Tis Treiva iv o'Ua eaBierat. 
— I Cor. xi. 34. 

' If any man is hungry let 
him eat at home.' 

Also I Cor. xiv. 35. 

(px^rai €ls OLKOV. — Mark iii. 
20. 

'He comes home' — prob., 
so perhaps Mark ix. 28. 



CHAPTER IV. 



Adjectives. 

A. — List of Adjectives common to E. and N.T. 

As in the case of Nouns, terms which are in 
common use in Classical Greek, in Epictetus and in 
the New Testament are omitted in the appended 
list ; any exceptions to this rule are due to a 
remarkable parallelism between E. and N.T. 

I. a86/ct/x09. 

The use of this term in E. in reference to coins 
in the sense of * spurious ' may be a suggestion that 
St. Paul employed the metaphor of the coin in his 
use of the term, e.g. : — 



E. 

UKovcrat, hia tl ras fiev 
doKifiovs dpaxfJ-as TrapadexVi 
ras 5' ddoKifiovs drroSoKi/xa- 
Cds ; — Bk. I., ch. vi., § 6. 

* To have heard why thou 
dost receive the genuine 
drachmae but reject the 
spurious.' 

Also Bk. IV., ch. v., § 17. 



N.T. 

fXT) TTios aWois KTipv^as ailTOS 
ddoKifios yevafxai. — I Cor. ix. 
27. 

' Lest having preached to 
others, I myself be rejected 
(as spurious) ' — A.V. : ' a 
castaway.' 

Also 2 Cor. xiii. 5, 6, 7, &c. 



2. atBio<i. 

This term, usually rendered 'everlasting,' 
* eternal,' seems to be a synonym of aloivio^. It 

48 



ADJECTIVES. 49 

does not of necessity denote * unendingness,' but 
the description of alcovio^ found in the Expositor 
for February, 1908 ('Lexical Notes from the Papyri,' 
p. 1 74) may often be applied to it : — 

* The word depicts that of which the horizon is 
not in view, whether the horizon be at an infinite 
distance, as in Catullus' poignant lines — 

Nobis cum semel occidit brevis lux, 
Nox est perpetua una dormienda, 

or whether it lies no further than the span of a 
Caesar's life.' 

Once in E. and once in N.T. the quality of *un- 
endingness ' seems to be present : — . 



E. 

aBavarov XPVI^^ V oXr^Beia koL 
aidiov. — Frag. Diss. 36. 

' Truth is an immortal and 
eternal thing.' 



N.T. 

rj T€ dittos avTov ^ivvajxis 
KOL BeiOTTjs. — Rom. i. 20. 

'Both His eternal power 
and divinity.' 



In the other passage, however, in N.T. where the 
term occurs, a limit is set to the length of time 
involved, the term apparently having the same 
meaning as aldyvio^;, which is found in the following 
verse. The passage is as follows : — 

dyyeXovf; re. . .66? Kploriv fieydXr)^ rj/jbepa^; Sea/jLocf; 
ai^ioi<^ vTTo ^ofjyov TertjprjKev. — ^Jude 6. 'And the 
angels He hath kept in everlasting bonds under 
darkness unto the judgment of the Great Day.' 

3. direpicnracrro^. 

Epictetus, urging that the Cynic should be un- 
married, uses this ter«n to denote the result, that he 

E 



50 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



will be 'without distraction.' St. Paul, speaking 
of a similar matter, uses the Adverb dTrepiairdcrTcot; 
in a similar way : — 



E. I 

i 

ToiavTris ^' ov(rrj5 Karaord- 
creo)?, ola vvv eariv, ms iv 
Traparn^eiy fir} nor dnepiana- 
CTTov eivai Set tov Kvvlkov oKov 
npos Tfi diaKoviarov Oeov . . . ; — 
Bk. III., ch. xxii., § 69. 

'But the state of things 
being such as it now is, as 
that of an army prepared for 
battle, surely the Cynic must 
be without distraction, de- 
voted entirely to the service 
of God...?' 



N.T. 

(St. Paul gives the advice 
8ia Trjv euecrraxrav dvdyKtjv, 

' on account of the present 
necessity ' — v. 26). 

npos TO €v<T)(r}pov Koi evnd- 
pehpov TO) Kvpi(o dnepiaTrdo-TOis. 
— I Cor. vii. 35. 

' For that which is seemly 
and that you may attend on 
the Lord without distrac- 
tion.' 



4. avTOX^tp. 

This term, meaning 'with one's own hands,' 
occurs once in E. and once in N.T. : — 



E. 

ovK av diriKBoav avroxftp 
iyevov rovTov tov dvOpaynov . . . ; 
— Bk. IV., ch. ix., § 12. 

'Wouldst thou not have 
gone away and laid (violent) 
hands on this man . . . ? ' 



N.T. 

Koi TJf TplTrj aVTOX^ip^S Tf)V 

(TKevrjv TOV ttXolov €piy\rav. — 
Acts xxvii. 19. 

*And on the third day 
they cast out with their own 
hands the tackling of the 
ship.' 



5. 6elo<i. 

The neuter with the article is used once in E. and 
once by St. Paul in his discourse to the Athenians 
in the sense of * the Deity ' : — 



ADJECTIVES. 



51 



tv ol TToXIrai riyiSiV eTna-rpacj)- 
€VT€S Tifxcoa-L TO Oelop, — Bk. II., 
ch. XX., § 22. 

'That our citizens may 
turn and honour the Deity.' 



N.T. 

oi/K 6(f)eL\0[JL€V vofxi^(LUxpv(T^ 
. . . TO Belov elvai ofioLov. — 
Acts xvii. 29. 

' We ought not to think 
that the Deity is like unto 
gold...' 
6. K€p6Bo^o<;. 

This comparatively late term — not being found 
before the time of Polybius — occurs once in E. 
and once in N.T. in the sense of 'vainglorious/ 
e.g. :— 



E. 

6 irpoaTTOiovfjievos to. firjbep 
npos avTov ecrrca dXa^ayv, taTto 
K€v68o^os. — Bk. Ill.jCh.xxiv., 

§ 43- 

' Let him who claims what 
doth not belong to him be 
arrogant, be vainglorious.' 



N.T. 

fxi] yivoiiieda K€j/d5o^of, aX- 
XrjKovs TrpoKoXovfievoi, aXXrj- 
\ois (pOovovvTfs. — Gal. V. 26. 

' Let us not show ourselves 
vainglorious, provoking one 
another, envying one an- 
other.' 



7. KOKKLVO'^. 

This adjective, the Latin *coccin(e)us ' found in 
Martial's Epigrams, Bk. II. 39, &c. — so Deissmann : 
Light from the Ancient East, p. yy — does not appear 
in Greek literature before the time of Plutarch. It 
is, moreover, according to Deissmann — v. above 
reference — one of the many N.T. words that have 
been discovered in Inscriptions. It occurs at least 
twice in E. and six times in N.T. It means 
* scarlet/ e.g. : — 



E. 

nXX* av aKovcrrjs, on ov Sei 
(popelv KOKKiva 
xi., § 34. 



Bk. IVy ch. 



N.T. 
Koi 7; yvvq rjv 7rept^6j3X>;/i- 
p-ivrj 7rop({>vpovv Kul kokkivov. 
— Rev. xvii. 4. 

E 2 



52 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

'But if thou hearest that 
it is not right to wear 
scarlet . . . ' 

Also Bk. III., ch.xxii.,§ lo. 



N.T. 

'And the woman was 
clothed in purple and 
scarlet' 

Also Matt, xxvii. 28, &c. 



8. Koa/iiio^. 

There is a remarkable parallelism in thought 
and language between two passages— one in E., 
the other in N.T. — in which this word occurs. The 
term is used in the sense of ' decent/ * modest ' : — 



N.T. 

( Understand /3ovXo/xai from 
preceding verse) — 

axravTcos yvvatKas ev Kara- 
arroXfj Koafiito fxera aldovs kol 
(Ta)(ppo(Tvvr]s Kocfie^v iavrds. — 
I Tim. ii. 9. 

' In like manner (I desire) 
that women adorn them- 
selves in decent apparel 
with modesty and sobriety.' 

Also I Tim. iii. 2. 



9. fiaKapio^;. 

This common N.T. term for ' happy ' — the 
classical synonym evBalficov does not occur in 
N.T. — is found at least twice in E., e.g. : — 



E. 
(In reference to women) — 
fV ovdei/l aXXw Ti[xoiVTai rj 
tS Kocr/Jiiai (f)aivea6aL koX aldrj- 
fioves. — Ench. xl. 

' For nothing else are they 
honoured but for the appear- 
ance of a decent and modest 
behaviour.' 



E. 

Kuv TTOu ixvpa<f>lov enirvx^Ds, 
}iaKapios €Lvai fioKely. — • Bk. 
IV., ch. ix., § 7. 

'And if thou dost meet 
with perfume anywhere, thou 
thinkest thyself happy.' 



N.T. 
fiandpioL ol nTa))(o\ tgJ 
TTvevp.ari. — Matt. V. 3. 

' Happy the poor in spirit.' 
Also Matt. V. 4, &c. 



ADJECTIVES. 



53 



lO. /jLerecopo^. 

This term occurs once in E. apparently in the 
sense of * elated.' It does not occur in N.T., but 
the Verb /nereo) pi^ofMai is found once, although the 
sense seems to be different from that of the Adjec- 
tive in E. : — 



orav SiXo), naXtv €v(f>paLur} 

KOI IX€T€(i>poS TTOpCVr) cls ^ AdrjUUS. 

— Bk. III., ch.xxiv., §75. 

'Whenever I please, thou 
mayst be cheerful again and 
set out elated for Athens.' 



N.T. 

fxf] ^r]T€lT€ Ti (pdyrjTe Koi rl 
TTirjTey Koi fiT) ixerccopl^eade. — 
Luke xii. 29. 

' Seek not what you shall 
eat and what you shall drink, 
and be not of doubtful mind.' 



1 1 . fjbcopo<;. 

This common N.T. term for * foolish ' is found 
with its synonyms acjipcov and dvorjrof; in E., e.g. : — 

E. 

ov8e\s ovv 6p.oXoyr}aei on 
acfypav iariv rj dvorjros . . . ov)(^ 
€vprj(r€t9 p,€ p.(op6v avOpanrov. — 
Bk. II., ch. xxi., §§ I, 2. 

' No one then will acknow- 
ledge that he is senseless or 
thoughtless. . .Thou wilt not 
find me a foolish man.' 



N.T. 

yeyova a(j)p(ov. — 2 Cor. xii. 
II. 

' I have become a fool.' 

0) avorjTui Koi ^padels tij 
Kaphia. — Luke xxi v. 25. 

' O foolish ones and slow 
of heart.' 

nivre bk i^ avrwv rjcrav pcapa'i. 
— Matt. XXV. 2. 

'But five of them were 
foolish.' 
12. V€Kp6^. 

At least twice in E. and once in N.T. this familiar 
term seems to be used not in the sense of * dead,' 
but in the sense of * mortal,' being virtually equiva- 
lent to dvijTOf; : — • 



54 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



^ 



N.T. 

TO fxev (TWfxa vfKpbv hut dfiap- 
riav. — Rom. viii. IQ. 

'The body is dead' (i.e. 
' mortal ') ' because of sin.' 

(So Sandayand Headlam : 
p. 198.) 



E. 

(Since we have the body in 
common with the animals) 
. . . uXXoi p.iv €Tn TavTTjv drro- 
kKIvovctl riju (Tvyyivaav tjjv 
(iTVxr] K(u VfKpav — Bk. I., ch. 
iii., § 3. 

' Some incline to this un- 
happy and inortal kindred.' 

Also Bk. II., ch. xix., § 27. 

13. oXoKXrjpo^. 

This word occurs at least twice in E., describing 
the body and a vessel, and twice in N.T. in the 
sense of ' whole,' ' entire ' : — 



N.T. 

oXoKXrjpnv vpLbiu to nvfvfxa 
Ka\ Tj "^v^r} Koi to acofxu . . . 
TrjpriBetr), — I Thess. V. 23. 

' May your spirit and soul 
and body be preserved entire.' 

iva T]T€ TeXcLoi Ka\ oKoKXrjpoi^ 
iv fJLTjdevl XeiTrofKPOi. — J as. i. 4. 

' That ye may be perfect 
and entire, lacking in noth- 
incr.' 



E. 
(Ti rt/xco TO abijxuTiov, 6X6- 

KXrjpOV aVTO €X€tV dvTL TToXkov 

trniovp.ai. — Bk. IV., ch. i., 

§151. 

' I still pay regard to my 
body, I set a great value on 
keeping it whole.' 

oKKa (TKevos p-eu oXoKXrjpov 
Kut xprjcripop €^(o eppippevov 
nils TiS evpcov dvaiprjo-eTaL koi 
Kfphos r)yT](T€Tai. . . — Bk. III., 
ch. xxvi., § 25. 

' But though anyone finding 
a whole and useful vessel 
that has been cast out of 
doors will pick it up and 
count it a gain . . .' 



14. o(no<^. 

This familiar N.T. term for * holy ' occurs at least 
once in E., where it is associated with evae^t]^ : — 



ADJECTIVES. 



55 



TO evae^es Koi to oaiou 
nolou Tt (Toi (f>atveTai ; — Bk. 
II., ch. XX., § 22. 

'What dost thou think of 
piety and holiness ? ' 



N.T. 

/SouXofiat ovv TTpo(T€vx((r6at 
Tovs av8pa9. . .enaipovTas oalovs 
Xftpov. — I Tim. ii. 8. 

' I desire then that the men 
pray. . .raising holy hands.' 



15. 7rov7jp6<;, <l)av\o<;. 

As in N.T., these two terms in E. have the same 
meaning as KaKo^;, ' bad,' * wrong,' ' wicked,' ' evil.* 
All three terms are found with Boyfia in E. in contrast 
with 6p66(;, * right,' e.g. el fiev 6p6a Boyfiara e%€t9, 
/caXco?, el Be (^avXa, Ka/€(A)<;. . .el. . .(j)av\a Be ri? ep^a 
B&yfiara . . . ttov 8' av rjvecrxov vtto tivo<; ef erafoyuevo?, 
on iT0V7]pa e^et9 Bojfiara ;. . .ec ri e^fo kukov Bojfia, 
dcpeXe avro. — Bk. III., ch. ix., §§ 2, 4, 9, 13. 'If 
thou hast right principles, well, if wrong, ill . . . If. . . 
but one has wrong ' (or ' bad ') ' principles . . . How 
wouldst thou have borne anyone examining thy 
principles, whether they were bad .\ . . If I have 
any bad principle, take it away.' 

For <j)av\o<; as applied to persons we may note 
the following examples in E. and N.T. : — 



E. 

olBcls apa T<av (pavXcov ^rj 
&)$• ^ovXerai. — Bk. IV., ch. i., 

§3. 

' No one then who is wicked 
lives as he likes.' 

Also Bk. IV., ch. v., § 8. 



N.T. 

Tray yap 6 cfiavKa rcpdaa-av 
fxiad TO (f)ais. — John iii. 20. 

' For everyone who prac- 
tises evil hates the light.' 

Also Rom. ix. 11 — where 
the contrast is with dya06s. 



In N.T. similarly 7roi/?;/309 and kuko^; are applied 



56 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



to persons, e.g. Matt. xxii. lo, where the contrast 
is again with a^aOo^, and Matt. xxiv. 48. 

16. 7rT6)%09. 

According to Liddell and Scott (p. 1342) this 
word * always had a bad sense till it was ennobled 
in the Gospels/ i.e. the sense of 'beggar.' But, 
whether or not its use in the Gospels could have 
influenced its use in E., with the one exception of 
^elvoi re irrcoxoi re — Bk. III., ch. xi., § 4, a quotation 
from Homer {Odyssey, xiv. 58), it is used in the 
N.T. sense of * poor.' In fact, the sense seems to 
be that of irevr)^, which never means 'beggar,' in 
Bk. III., ch. xxvi., § 8 : 66 aov 01 yovel^ irivrjTef; 
rjaav {rj irXovcnoi fxlv rjaav) ' if thy parents were 
poor (or were rich),' e.g. : — 



E. 

6 S' ort TTToyxos iariv, 6 6 on 
Tvaripa ;^aXe7r6i/ ex^t rj jxrjTe'pa 

...-Bk. IV., ch. i., § 43- 

' Another (thinks the cause 
of his evils to be) that he is 
poor, another that he has a 
harsh father or mother . . . ' 

(TV 8' . . . BeXfLS, ov SeXeis, 
TTTCoxorepos p.ov. — Bk. III., ch. 
ix., § i6. 

' But thou, . . . whether 
thou dost wish it or not, art 
poorer than I.' 



N.T. 

T) xhP"' (^^T^] '} TTTcaxv TrXeioi/ 
7rdvT<ov ej3a\eu. . . — Mark xii. 

43. 

' This poor widow cast 
more than all . . .' 

ovx o 0f(W e^fXe'^aro rovs 
TTTcoxovs rw Koapco ttXovctiovs 
iv TTiorei. . . : — Jas. ii. 5. 

' Did not God choose the 
poor as to the world to be 
rich in faith . . . ? ' 



17. O-aTT/OO?. 

The literal sense of ' rotten,' * putrid,' ' corrupt,' 
found in earlier Greek writings is not found in E. 



ADJECTIVES. 



57 



and N.T. ; here the meaning is *of poor quality/ 
* rotten ' (in the modern slang sense of the term), or 
perhaps sometimes ' (morally) corrupt' It is some- 
times used in contrast with aryado^y KaXo^ ov kojjl'^^o^: 
in E. it is sometimes used as an expression of 
dislike or contempt, e.g. : — 

N.T. 

(Of a tree and fruit.) 

TO he crairpov bivbpov Kapnovs 
TTOurjpovs TTOul ' ov bvvaTca 8ev- 
dpov ayaQov Kaprrovs Troprjpovs 
eveyKelp, ov8e devdpov aanpov 
KapTTOvs KaXovs noielv, — Matt, 
vii. 17, 18. 

'But the tree of poor 
quality produces evil fruit ; 
a good tree cannot bear bad 
fruit, nor can a tree of poor 
quality produce good fruit.' 

Also Matt. xii. 33, Luke vi. 

43. 

(Of the contents of a fish- 
net.) 

(TvviXe^av ra KoXa els ayyr]. 
Tit de a-aTTpa €^<t> t/SaXoj/. — 
Matt. xiii. 48 

'They gathered the good 
into vessels, but the worthless 
they cast away.' 



E. 

(Of a household utensil.) 

elra orKevdpiou fxev el fjs ovrat 
aairpop, axxre <joi TTpbs firjbev 
SvvaGrSaL xpW^^f- • • • — Bk. II., 
ch. iv., § 4. 

' Then if thou hadst been 
a vessel of such poor quality 
that thou couldst have been 
of no use.' 

(Of a foundation.) 

ap de (rawpop vpoo-rrjo-r] koI 
KaraTrlTTTOp, ovk (olKo8op,r](reis 
ol8e p.iKp6p) olK.obofj,r)p.dTiop. — 
Bk. II., ch. XV., § 9. 

'But if thou shalt have 
laid a poor and unsteady 
foundation (thou wilt) not 
(even build a small) house.' 

(Of vinegar and honey.) 

TO o^os aanpov, dpifiv yap ' 
TO fxeXc amvpop, dpaTpeiref, yap 
pov TT}P e^iv. — Bk. IV., ch. iv., 
§25. 

' Vinegar is disagreeable, 
for it is sour ; honey is dis- 
agreeable, for it disorders 
my constitution.' 

(Of a coin of Nero's.) 

plyjrop e^o), ddoKipop ^eaTi, 
aranpop. — Bk. IV., ch. v., § 17. 



58 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

* Throw it away, it is worth- 
less, good for nothing.' 

(Of — living — geese.) 

6 vs Kcii TO. aairpa x^v'ibta 
Koi (TKuiXrjKes Koi dpa;(i/ai. — 
Bk. IV., ch. xi., §31. 

' The swine and the nasty 
geese and worms and spiders.' 

(Of principles.) 

onov 6' tiu r) aanpu doyfiara 
eK€2 Ttavra ravra (Ivai avayKi). 
— Bk. III., ch. 22, §61. 

'And wherever there are 
unsound principles, there, of 
necessity, must all these 
things' (e.g. griefs, disap- 
pointments, jealousies) 'be.' 

(Of words — perhaps in the 
sense of ' morally corrupt.') 

eKclvoi [xev ra (rcnrpa ravra 
(iTTO doyndrcov \a\ova-iv, vixels 
de ra KO/j-yp^a dno rciiv ^eiXcoi'. 
— Bk. III., ch. xvi., §7. 

' They ' (the vulgar) ' utter 
these profitless' {or 'cor- 
rupt') 'words from principles, 
but you from your lips.' 



N.T. 



(Of words, in the sense of 
' profitless ' — so Expcrs. Gk.^ 
Test.^ Vol. III., p. 347 — or 
perhaps ' morally corrupt.') 

irds \6yos craTTfios €k rov 
crroixdros vixcov fxr] eKTVopevicrOiO^ 
dWd ft ris dya6u9 npos olko- 
doprjv rrjs xp^'f-^^^' — Eph. iv. 29. 

' Let no profitless ' {or ' cor- 
rupt ') ' word come forth out 
of your mouth, but that 
which is good for building 
up of the need.' 

Similarly in E. the adverb o-airpm is used in the 
sen.se of * poorly,' ' badly/ in association with 

€V ^CKOTToXei aairpMf; \oveL ra jBaXavela ' koX ev 
OLKco KUKOjii KOi 0)36 KaKU)<i, — Bk. II., ch. xxi., § 14' 



ADJECTIVES. 



59 



* In Nicopolis the baths wash badly ; and at home 
and here things go ill' 

1 8. raXaiTTcopo^. 

Epictetus and St. Paul use this term in the same 
sense of * wretched ' and in the same kind of 
context, aapKihta of the one corresponding to 
acofiuTo^ of the other ; but, as Bonhoffer^ points 
out, for different reasons : E. because happiness 
was sought in the flesh, St. Paul because he was 
confined to the body. We append the passages :— 



E. 

TL yap flfiL ; * ToXainoipov av- 
Bpconiipiov ' Ka\ ' to. dvcTTrji'd 
fxov aapKibia.^ — Bk. I., ch. iii., 

§5. 

'For what am I?' "A 
wretched man " and " My 
miserable flesh."' 

AlsoBk. III., ch. xvi., §7. 



N.T. 

TaXatVcopos eyS) avOpoinos 
Tii fie pvacrat €K tov aatfiarns 
Tov Oavarov tqvtov ; — Rom. 
vii. 24. 

* Wretched man that I am ! 
Who shall deliver me from 
the body of this death ? ' 

Also Rev. iii. 17. 



19. TeX6f09. 

This common N.T. term is used once at least in 
E. in the sense of ' full-grown ' in contrast with 
fietpaKiov. Similarly St. Paul and the author of 
Hebrews (v. 13, 14) use it in contrast to vrjinoi : — 



E. 

ovK en ft fxeipiiKiov, oXXa 
dvrfp ^8rf TfXctoff. — Ench. li., 
§1. 



N.T. 

p-expt KaTavTr)(T(Ofi€P . . . ft? 
av8pa TeXeiov . . . Iva p.r}K€Tt 
ci)fi€v vTjmoi. — Eph. iv. 13, 14. 



* Epiktet uitd das Neue Testament (p. 68) in the series 
Reli^ionsgeschichiliche Versnche iind Vorarbeite7i : Giessen, 
1911. ♦ 



6o EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
' Thou art no longer a boy, 
but a full-grown man.' 



N.T. 
' Until we arrive . . . unto 
a full-grown man . . . that we 
may be no longer children.' 

20. (piX6aTopyo<;. 

This strong term 'tenderly affectionate' occurs 
once in E. and once in N.T. : — 



E. 

7ra>s ovv y€v(Ofiai (fnXoarop- 
yos ; — Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 
§58. 

' How then am I to be- 
come tenderly affectionate ? ' 



N.T. 

rfj (^tXaSeX^ia els dXKTjXovs 
<f)iX6<TTopyoi . . . — Rom. xii. 
10. 

' In love of the brethren 
tenderly affectionate to one 
another.' 



B. — Comparatives and Superlatives. 

As we should expect, there are many instances 
both in E. and in N.T. of the Comparative being 
used in the usual sense of ' — er (than).' In E. the 
Comparative is sometimes used in the classical 
sense of ' somewhat — ,' e.g. kclv avaTrearj'; Be/ca 
rjfjiipa'iy avadTa^ ein'xelpr^aov fiaKpoTepav 68ov irepi- 
irarrjaac koX oyfrei ttco? crov ra a/ceXr] rrapaXveTai. — 
Bk. II., ch. xviii., § 3. * If thou hast been reclining 
for ten days, get up and attempt a somewhat long 
walk and thou wilt see how thy legs are weakened.' 
iycb BeiXorepo^ elfiL, ofioXoyoo. — Bk. II., ch. xxi., § 2. 
* I am somewhat cowardly, I confess.' 

This is true of Adverbs, e.g. yjrvxpoTepov. — 
Bk. III., ch. xxiii., § 10. ' Somewhat coldly.' 

But in E. and N.T. there are cases of confusion 



ADJECTIVES. 



6i 



and 



between Comparatives and Superlatives, one being 
used for the other. 

I. Comparative in place of Superlative. 

N.T. 
vvvl de fxcvei ivlffTi^y iXnis, 
dydTTT) ' TO. Tpla ravTii, fxei^tou 
be TovTOiv rj dydnr}. — I Cor. xiii. 

13- 

' But now abideth faith, 
hope, love : these three, 
but the greatest of these is 
love.' 

Kara navra w? deicrtdaifiop- 
earepovs vfids 3€copa>. — Acts 
xvii. 22. 

According to Dr. J. H. 
Moulton,^ as is used as with 
a superlative : 

'In all things I perceive 
you to be exceedingly re- 
ligious ' {or ' as religious as 
possible'). 



E. 

(Referring to i 
meadows.) 

ov ydf) Tovs Kop.'^oTfpovs rjfjuv 
roTTOvs eK\e^6pevos . . . (\rjXv0as. 
— Bk. II., ch. xxiii., § 39. 

' For thou hast not come 
to choose our finest places . . . ' 

So /oo, probably — 

oKKo hk rl TMV p,lKpOT€p(OP 

epyoiv VTTo dnpoo-e^ias emreX- 
elrat Kpelaaov ; — Bk. IV., ch. 

xi.,§5. 

'But is any other of the 
smallest tasks performed 
better by inattention ? ' 



2. Superlative in place of Comparative. 

(We may compare the current English custom 
* the best of the two.') 

N.T. 
Moulton gives two in* 
stances {Proleg.^ p. 79) : — 
Trpwroy p.ov r)v. — John i. 15. 



E. 
eV Topevfiari t'l KpdricTTOv 
eariVj 6 apyvpos rj 17 Te^vrj ; — 
Bk. III., ch. vii., § 24. 



^ The writer is not sure whether this statement has 
appeared in print, but he remembers it being given in a class 



at Didsbury (probably) yi 1906. 



62 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



'In an embossed wofk 
which is the better, the silver 
or the workmanship ? ' 



N.T. 

' He was before me.' 

cfxe rrpcoTou vfiwv fi€fiL(rr]K.€v. 
— John XV. 1 8. 

' It has hated me before 
(it hated) you.' 

So too, perhaps, npoiTov in 
Acts i. I means 'former' — 
so Moulton {v. supra). 

3. There is one passage in E. in which a Superlative 
and a Comparative are used in parallel clauses, in 
such a way that we must treat them alike, either as 
two Superlatives or two Comparatives : — 

dyada Be ra tov Kparlo-Tov /cpetTTovd iariv rf rd 
Tov (pavXorepov ; — Bk. III., ch. vii., § 4. * Which are 
better ? The good things of the best ' (or ' better ') 
* or of the worst ' (or ' worse ') .-* 

As the immediate context, however, refers to two 
things — soul and flesh — it seems more correct to 
treat these forms as two Comparatives. 



CHAPTER V. 

Verbs. 

A. — List oj Verbs common to Epictetus and the 

Neiv Testament. 

In the appended list the rule will be followed 
which has been adopted in the case of Nouns and 
Adjectives, i.e. Verbs in common use in Classical 
Greek, in Epictetus and the New Testament are 
omitted except where there are instances of remark- 
able parallelism between E. and N.T. 

I. a'^/pvTTveco. 

This term is used by earlier writers in the sense 
of ' be sleepless,' but when found in E. and N.T. it 
means 'keep watch,' e.g. : — 



OV Td(f)pOV (TKCl^eL TLS, OV 

XapaKa nepi^aXel, ov< dypv- 
Trvrjaei, ov Kivdwevaei. — Bk. 
III., ch. xxiv., § 32. 

* No one will dig a trench, 
or throw up a rampart, or 
keep watch, or expose him- 
self to danger.' 

Also Bk. I., ch. vii,, § 30, 
Bk. IV., ch. i., § 176. 



N.T. 

avTol yap dypvnpovarip vnep 
rdv y^rvx^av vfx&u. — Heb. xiii. 
17. 

' For they keep watch on 
behalf of your souls.' 

Also Eph. vi. 18, &c. 



63 



64 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

2. ar^di and its compounds, TrpocTwyai, virdyco. 

In E. and N.T. these are used intransitively in 
the sense of ' go ' or * come,' e.g. : — 



a. dyoo — in pres. subj., ist plural. 



E. 



N.T. 



ayco^ep eVl top avOvTrarov. — aycofiei/ els Tt]u ^lovbaiau 



Bk. III., ch. xxii., § 55. 

' Let us go before the pro- 
consul.' 

^. TTpoawytM). 

E. 

epX^crOai del Trpoy rbv Xoyoj/, 
(OS TTpos TO, y(Q)p,CTpL<a npocr- 
dyop.€v, o)S Trpos to. povatKa. — 
Bk. II., ch. xvii., § 39. 

* We must come to reason, 
as we come' {or 'go') 'to 
mathematics or music' 

Also Bk. III., ch. XV., § 12. 



iraXiv. — John xi. 7. 

' Let us go into Judaea 
again.' 

Also Matt. xxvi. 46, &c. 



N.T. 

Kara peaov t^s vvktos vne- 
voovv oi vavTOL Trpoadyeiv riua 
avTois x^Rf^^' — Acts xxvii. 27. 

* About midnight the sailors 
surmised that some land was 
approaching them.' 



7. virdyco — very common, especially in com- 
mands. 



N.T. 

vnaye, aeavrov del^nu t^ 
iepel. — Matt. viii. 4. 

'Go, show thyself to the 
priest.' 

Also Mark xi. 2 ; John iii. 
I 8, &c. 

As in the Papyri (Expositor for July 1908, p. 91), 



E. 

vnaycy ir]T(L ra naihia. — 
Bk. III., ch. xxii., § 106. 
' Go, seek the children.' 
Also Bk. III., ch. xxi., 
§ 6, &c. 



VERBS. 



65 



SO this term occurs in E. 
* I have received (to the 

E. 

TO yap evdaifiovovv a7re\fti' 
Set Trdvra a ^eXet, 7re7r\r)p(ofiev(o 
Tivi €oiK€vai. — Bk. III., ch. 
xxiv., § 17. 

' For that which is happy 
must have received all that 
it desires, like one that has 
eaten to the full.' 

Also Bk. III., ch. ii., §3. 



and N.T. in the sense of 
full),' e.g. :- 

N.T. 

aTrixovcnv top fiKrOov avratv 
— Matt. vi. 5. 

' They have received their 
reward.' 

a7re;(o) he rravTa Kiii Tvepicr- 
aev(o, — Phil. iv. 1 8. 

'But I have received all 
things and I abound.' 

Also Matt. vi. 2, &c. 



4. UTToBo/CLfld^a). 

Of this common Classical and N.T. term for 
'reject' there is at least one example in E. which 
is given under aSoKifio^; (Chapter IV., p. 48). 

5. l3dW(o. 

This verb is used intransitively twice in E. and 
once in N.T. : — 



E. 

ei yap ovtch ravra ex^t, 
jSaXo)!/ KaOevde Ka\ to. tov 
(rKtaXrjKos Tvoiei. — Bk. II., ch. 
XX., § 10. 

' For, if these things are 
so, lie down and sleep and 
play the part of the worm.' 

Also Bk. IV., ch. X., § 29. 



N.T. 

(Not quite in the same 
sense as in E.) 

e/3aXev Kar avrrjs uvcpos 
TvcficoviKos. — Acts xxvii. 14. 

'There beat' (or 'fell') 
' down from it a tempestuous 
wind.' 



6, ^aTTTl^CO. 

In two passages in N.T. this term is used in the 
sense of ' wash ' : — 

F 



66 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

OTi ov TTpoiTOV e^aTTTidOrj irpo tov aplarov. — 
Luke xi. 38. 'Because he had not washed before 
breakfast.' 

(Reading W. H. margin the text has pavTlacov- 
Tuiy * sprinkle themselves '), ol jap ^apicratoi . . . eav 
fjiy) TTvyfJifj vLyfrcovrac ra? %e?pa9 ovk eadlovaiv, , . 
Kol aiT ajopa<i eav /jlt] /SaTrrtarcovTac ovk iadlovaiv 
. . .^airriafMOV^ iroTTjpiwv /cal ^earcov kuI ^aX/t/o)!^. — 
Mark vii. 3, 4. * For the Pharisees . . . unless they 
have washed their hands with the fist, eat not. . . 
and, after returning from the market-place, unless 
they have washed they eat not. . .washings of cups 
and pots and brazen vessels.' If the reading 
/SaTTTLacovTai be incorrect, we, at any rate, have the 
noun ySaTTTicr/iou? in the same sense. 

There is one passage in E. in which the term 
occurs. Here again the meaning is not * baptize,' 
but the meaning is different from that of the word 
as used in the above two passages. Starting with 
the thought of * dip,' N.T. develops that of * wash * ; 
starting with the same thought, E. develops that of 
* sink.' The passage is as follows : — 

MCTirep OVK av i^ovXov iv vift /jLeydXy Kal yXacjivpa, 
Kal TToXv^p^o-q) irXecov ^airri^eaOaL — Stob. 47. 
' Just as thou wouldst not like to sink when sailing 
in a large, fine and gilded ship. . .' 

7. jSadTu^o). 

This term is found both in E. and in N.T. in the 
sense of ' lift,' ' bear,' e.g. : — 



VERBS. 



67 



N.T. 

€i3dcrTa(Tav ndkiv XiOovs 01 
*Iov8cnoL. — John X. 31. 

'Again the Jews took up 
stones.' 

en TToWd €X<>i vfiiv Ae'-yetj/, 
aXX* ov bvvaaOe ^aard^eiv 
aprt. — John xvi. 12. 

' I have yet many things 
to say to you, but you can- 
not bear' (i.e. 'endure') 
' them now.' 

audpcoTTos Kepdpiov vSaros 
^aa-TciCcop. — Mark xiv. 1 3. 

'A man bearing' (i.e. 
'carrying') 'a pitcher of 
water.' 

Also Luke xiv. 27, &c. 



The N.T. sense, however, of 'carrying away,' 
found in John xx. 15 ^ €i orv efidaraaa'^ avrop, 'If 
thou hast carried Him away,' and probably in John 
xii. 6 : ra /BaWofjueva ijBdaja^eVy ' he used to carry * 
{or * carry away ') ' what was put in,' is not found 
in E. 



E. 

(Of an athlete.) 

ov ^aard^d. pc. — Bk. I., ch. 
xxix., § 35. 

' He does not lift me.' 

(TKi>^ai 7rpS)TOv rt ecrrt to 
TTpdypaj etra Koi rrjv aavTov 
<Pv(riv, Ti dvvaaai /Saordcra/.. — 
Bk. III., ch. XV., §9. 

' Consider first what the 
matter is, then too thy own 
nature, what thou canst 
bear ' (i.e. ' endure '). 

Also Bk. I., ch. iii., § 2, &c. 



8. ^id^ofiaL 

This word is used at least twice in E. and once 
in N.T. in the middle sense of ' force one's way ' : — 



E. 

UTroKkdapos €po\ ov ytVerat, 
dXKd Tols (3iaCop€voLs. did t'l 
ovv ov ^id^opai ; — Bk. IV., 
ch. vii., §§ 20, 21. 

* Being shut out does liot 



N.T. 
OTTO Tore 1) fSaaiXeia tov Qeov 
evayyeXi^eTiu Koi nus els (ivtt]v 
^id^erai. — Luke xvi. 16. 

' From that time the good 
tidings of the Kingdom of 
F 2 



68 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. N.T. 

relate to me, but to those God are being announced 
who (try to) force their way | and every man forces his 
in. Why then do not I (try | way into it.' 
to) force my way in ?' | 

There is nothing in E. to correspond to the use 
of 13. as passive in Matt xi. 12 : ?; ^aaiXela tmv 
oupavMP ^La^erai, 'The Kingdom of Heaven is 
suffering violence.' 

9. pKeiTO). 

This occurs at least once in E. and many times 
in N.T. in the sense of ' look to/ * pay attention to/ 
e.g. :— 



N.T. 

/SXeTTfre be vfiels eavrovs.- 
Mark xiii. 9. 
' But look to yourselves.' 



E. 

KOI flTj fXOl naTTTTOVS avTov 

KoX irpoirdnTTovs ^Xe7^e. — Bk. 
IV., ch. i., § 57. 

' And do not, I pray, pay 
attention to his grandfathers 
or great-grandfathers.' 

10. ^ovXofiai, 6e\(t), 

That it is difficult to distinguish these terms in 
meaning in E. and N.T. may be seen from a con- 
sideration of the following passages : — 

N.T. 

TToXXa e;^a)i' vyuv ypd(f)eiv 
ovK €^ovXr]dr]v Sid )(^dpTov /cat 
fieXavos. — 2 John 12. 

TToXXa eixov ypd-^ai (rot, 
aXX' ov 6e\a> 8id fxeXavos koI 
KoXdfiov aoi ypd(f)€iv. — 3 John 

13. 
'Though I had' {or 'have') 



E. 

fcayo) BeXco. 
OeXei fif TVX^t^v Tivos ' Kayo) 
/3ovXo/xai. ov BeXei ' ov ^ov- 
Xofiai. dnoOavelv ovv ^eXco. — 
Bk. IV., ch. i., §§ 89, 90. 

*It is His will that I 
should desire ; it is my will 
too. It is His will that I 



VERBS. 



69 



E. 
should obtain something ; 
I wish it too. It is not His 
will ; I do not wish it. It is 
my will ' (or ^ I am willing ') 
' then to die.' 



N.T. 
* many things to write to you 
I did ' (or ' do ') ' not wish to 
do so by means of paper 
and ink.' 

* I had ' (or ' have ') 'many 
things to write to thee, but 
I am not willing to write to 
thee by means of pen and 
ink.' 



When there is a marked difference of meaning, 
PovXofiai = ' I wish,' OeXto = ' I will ' or * I am 
willing.' In the latter sense OeXco is weaker than 
/SovXo/jLatf but not so in the former sense. There 
are two other instances in E. and one in N.T. where 
the two verbs are used together : — 



E. 

^oiiKofiat, ypdcjieiv <ms ^e'X(o 
TO Aiavos ovona ; ov ' dWa 
8idd(rK0[xaL 0e\€iVj as 8el ypd- 
(fica-dai. — Bk. I., ch. xii., § 13. 

' Do I wish to write the 
name of Dion as I like' 
(or ' will ') ? ' No ; but I am 
taught to be willing to write 
it as it must be written.' 

In this passage BeXa is 
used first in a stronger and 
then in a weaker sense. 

Also Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 
§54. 



N.T. 

OP eyo) e^ovXofirjv npos ip-av- 
Tov Karex^tv, • • • X^P''^ ^^ ^^^ 
yvmfiTjs ov8ev r}6eXT]cra noirjcrai. 
— Philemon 13, 14. 

'Whom I was wishing to 
retain for myself, . . . but 
apart from thy mind I was 
unwilling to do anything.' 

In this passage it seems 
clear that BiXca is weaker 
than ^ovXofiai} 



^ Dr. Moulton, however, suggests that at BiXto is very 
strong, ' I won't.' • 



yo EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



N.T. 

e 'Ir/crov yevvrjOevTOs ev 



Malt. 



TOV 

BrjBXfen TTjs 'lovdaias. 
ii. I. 

' Now when Jesus had been 
born in Bethlehem of Judaea.' 

Also John ix. 2, 19, &c. 



11. yevvaco. 

This term is used twice in E. and several times 
in N.T. in the sense of ' bear/ rather than of 
• beget ' :— 
E. 

ep Hep(rais fxiu yevvrjOds 
ovK (av) eaTTCvdcs oIkcIv Tr)v 
EXXaSa . . .iv nevia 8i yevur]- 
6€L5, Ti crnevdeis TrXovrelv. . . ; 
— Stob. 12. 

' If thou hadst been born 
in Persia thou wouldst not 
have been eager to live in 
Greece . . . but since thou 
hast been born in poverty, 
why art thou eager to be 
rich....?' 

12. yv/jbvd^o). 
This is common both 

metaphorical sense, e.g. : 
E. 

Trpwroj/ ovv eni r^s Oecopias 
yvfivd^ovaiv Tjfias 01 (f)i\6<Tocf)oi. 
— Bk. I., ch. xxvi., § 3. 

' First then the philoso- 
phers exercise us in theory.' 

Also Bk. I., ch. i., § 3, &c. 

So aytav, ' contest,' is used in a metaphorical 
sense, e.g. Bk. II., ch. xviii., § 28 ; 2 Tim. iv. 7. 

13. SiaKovieo. 

This common N.T. word occurs also in E. : in 
one passage in E. it is associated with vTnjpeTeeo — 
also a N.T. word : — 



in 



E. and in N.T. 



m a 



N.T, 

yu/ii/a^e de creavroi/ npos 
evatlSeiav. — I Tim. iv. 7. 

' But exercise thyself unto 
godliness.' 

Also Heb. v. 14, &c. 



VERBS. 



71 



E. 

iKclva TCI €pya e^' ols reray- 
fi€vaL flal biaKov€LV Tavrrj kcu 
vTTTjpeTelv. — Bk. II.,ch. xxiii., 
§11. 

' Those offices in which 
they have been appointed to 
minister to it and serve it.' 



N.T. 

6 vios TOV avOpOiTTOV OVK 

rlKBev diaKovTjOrjpaL akXa 8ia- 
Kovrjarai. — Mark x. 45. 

' The Son of Man came 
not to be ministered unto, 
but to minister.' 

Also Matt. XXV. 44, &c. 



The noun Wikovo^ — another N.T. term — is found 
in E., e.g. ct)9 BtaKovot teal BoOXat rerayfJuivaL elalv 
virripeTelv — Bk. II., ch. xxiii., § 7. * They have been 
appointed as ministers and slaves to serve.' 

14. BovXaycoyeo). 

This late Greek word, 'treat as a slave' — not 
found before the end of the ist century B.C. — occurs 
at least twice in E. and once in N.T. : — 



E. 

Ti Xeyeis irpos tovtov tou 
SovXayoiyovvTo. ere; — Bk. III., 
ch. xxiv., § 76. 

What sayest thou to this 
man who is treating thee as 
a slave .'' ' 

Also Bk. IV., ch. vii., § 17. 



N.T. 

VTrcoTrid^o) fiov to aoiyfia Kal 
8ovkay(oya>. — I Cor. ix. 27. 

' I beat my body black and 
blue and treat it as a slave.' 



15. efjbiTepTrepevofiai. 

This verb occurs once in E., but not in N.T. In 
the latter, however, the simple verb irepirepevo^ai 
occurs once in the same sense 'be a braggart.' 
Both verbs are post-classical, as is the Adjective 
irepTTepo^, 'braggaii,' which occurs once in E. — 



72 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



Bk. III., ch. ii., § 14. We append the passages in 
which the Verb occurs : — 



avayv(0(TTj Km e^TrepTrepet/o-j/, 
* Idov TTcdS hiakoyovs avvTi- 
6t) 111 ' ;—Bk. II., ch. i., §34. 

' Wilt thou read and brag, 
" See how I compose dia- 
logues " ? ' 



N.T. 

rj ayanr). . .ov nepnepeverai. 
— I Cor. xiii. 4. 

' Love . . . vaunteth not 
itself.' 



16. 6/jL7rXeKco. 

This term, meaning ' entangle,' which is applied 
by St. Paul to Timothy as a soldier of Christ Jesus, 
is applied in E. to the Cynic who is devoted to the 
service of God : — 



E. 

firj . . . civai bel top kvvikov 
. . . ov TTpoadeBefxevov Ka6r]Kov- 
(TLv IhiiOTiKOLS ou8' efiTrcTrXey- 
fxivov (Tx^o-ecnv, as irapa^alvuiv 
. . . ; — Bk. III., ch. xxii., § 69. 

' Surely. . .the Cynic must 
. . . not be tied down to vulgar 
duties, nor entangled in re- 
lations, by transgressing 
which . . . ? ' 



N.T. 

ovBels (TrpaT€v6iievos efinXcK- 
erat reus tov ^lov Trpayfiariais. 
— 2 Tim. ii. 4. 

' No man serving as a 
soldier is entangled ' (or ' en- 
tangleth himself) Mn the 
affairs of life.' 

Also 2 Pet. ii. 20. 



I/' iimrX^jao-ot). 

This term, common in Plato in the sense of 
* rebuke,' is so used once in E. and once in N.T. : — 

E. 



(Speaking of approaches 
to indecent speech.) 

au fiiv evKcupop fi, kol eVi- 



N.T. 

TTpea^vrepoa fxfj eTTLTrKrj^pSy 
dWa napaKoXei. cos Tvaripa. — 
I Tim. V. I. 



VERBS. 



71 



E. 



N.T. 

' Rebuke not an elder, but 
exhort him as a father.' 



ttXtj^op rw npoeXBovTi. — Ench. 
xxxiii., § i6. 

If there be a favourable 
opportunity rebuke him who 
makes the approach.' 

1 8. iTTlCTK 0176(0. 

This common Classical term occurs both in E. 
and in N.T. in the sense of 'inspect,' 'watch 
over,' e.g. : — 

! 



E. 

6 ^cKTiXevs . . . ov Bel rovs 
iiWovs imcrKoTTelv^ rovs ye- 
yafxrjKoras . . . — Bk. III., ch. 
xxii., § 72. 

' The king . . . who must 
watch over others, married 
men. . .' 

Also Bk. I., ch. xi., § 38, &c. 



N.T. 

€7n(TKOnOVVT€S firj TLS V(TT€- 

pcov dno T^s x^pf-Tos tov ©eoO. 
— Heb. xii. 15. 

' Watching lest there be 
one falling short of the grace 
of God.' 

Also I Pet. V. 2. 



19. e'maTpe(f>(o. 

Once in E. this term is used in the passive in the 
moral sense of 'conversion,' like the intransitive 
active and the passive of arpicjico (Matt, xviii. 3, 
John xii. 40) in N.T. : — 



IV oi froXirat fjumv eniaTpa- 
<f)€VT€s Tifiaai TO Oelop. — Bk. 
II., ch. XX., § 22. 

' That our citizens may 
turn and honour the Deity.' 



N.T. 

fxeTavoTjaare ovv Koi eViarpc- 
^are irpos to i^aKK^Orjvai 
vfiav Tcis AfiapTtas. — Acts iii. 
19. 

' Repent therefore and 
turn, that your sins may be 
blotted out.' 

Also Luke xxii. 32, &c. 



74 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



20. ev'X,ctpL(TTeo). 

This post-classical word for * thank ' is common 
both in E. and in N.T., e.g. : — 

N.T. 

Gew €\ctfi(v 6dp(Tos. — Acts 
xxviii. 15. 

' Paul thanked God and 
took courage.' 

Also I Cor. i. 4, &c. 



E. 

firjT dxapiams IcrOi . . . dXX' 
tmep fxiv Toi) opav Ka\ aKoveiv 
Kcii vff Ala vrrep avrov rod (fjv 
. . . €V)(fipi(rTei TW 6(a. — Bk. 
II., ch. xxiii., § 5. 

' Be not thankless . . . but 
for sight and hearing and, 
in fact, for life itself. . .thank 
God.' 

Also Bk. II., ch. vii., § 9, 
&c. 



21. 0X113(0 i 0-T€I^O%ft)/3eft). 

These words occur together in at least two 
passages in E. and once in N.T. : — 



E. 

iavTovs 6\i^op€u^ eavTovs 

aT€VOX(OpOVp(V, TOVt' €(TTL TCI 

b6yp,aTa r)p.ds OXi^ei kol arcvo- 
^copet. — Bk. I., ch. XXV., § 28. 

* We squeeze, we straiten 
ourselves, that is our prin- 
ciples squeeze and straiten 
us.' 

Also Bk. I., ch. XXV., § 26. 

The corresponding Nouns OxI'^l^, arevoxoopta are 
also common. 



N.T. 

tV rravrl ffKi^ofxevoi dXX' ov 
aT€vn)(^Q)povp.€voi. — 2 Cor. iv. 8. 

' Pressed on every side, 
but not straitened.' 

(^Xi/3cD is very common : 
o-rej/oxwpf'w occurs twice.) 



22. Opia/M^€vco. 

This post-classical word, meaning ' triumph over,' 



VERBS. 



75 



* lead in triumph,' occurs once in E. and twice in 
N.T. :— 

N.T. 
T« be 0eft> X"P*^ ''^ Trap- 
TOT€ Opiafi^evovTt Tjfias ev tw 
Xpto-rw.— 2 Cor. ii. 14. 

' But to God be thanks 
who always leads us in 
triumph in Christ.' 
Also Col. ii. 15. 



E. 

olov ol Tois Opiafx^evovaiv 
€(^etrrcoreff omaBcp koX vno- 
fiiUvrja-Kovres otl audpconoi 
fla-i. — Bk. III., ch.xxiv.,§ 85. 

* Like those who stand 
behind generals celebrating 
a triumph and remind them 
that they are men.' 



23. /carafcvTrrct), irapa/cvirTa). 

In the sense of ' stoop (and peep) * these terms 
are found in E. and in N.T., KaraKviTTO) once, 
irapaKVTTTOt) several times : — 

N.T. 

Koi na\iv KaraKV'^as eyparfyev 
els TTjv yrjv. — John viii. 8. 

*And again stooping down, 
He wrote on the ground.' 

(OS ovu eKkaiev 7raptKv\j/ev 
els TO p.ur)ne7ov, koi Oetapel hvo 
dyyeXovs. — John xx. 11, 12. 

' Whilst she was weeping 
therefore she stooped and 
peeped into the tomb, and 
beholds two angels.' 

Also James i. 25, &c. 



evdvs eyco orau TrXeo), kutu- 
Kvy^ras els top ^vOop ^ to 
neXayos itepi^Xe-^dp-epos ... — 
Bk. II., ch. xvi., § 22. 

' For instance, whenever I 
am on a voyage, stooping 
and looking into the deep 
or glancing around upon the 
sea. . .' 

Ka6f]p.e0a (T7ra>fiepoi koi tto- 
paKVTTTop^ep avpe)((i)Si tIs apefios 
TTpei ; — Bk. I., ch. i., § 16. 

' We sit anxious and con- 
tinually look out to see which 
way the wind blows.' 

Also other instances. 



24. Kiveo). 

Once in E. and^once in N.T. the middle (or 



76 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



passive) of this Verb is used very much in the 
sense of ' live ' : — 



E. 

nois yap dvvarai afXTre'Kos fxf) 
afXTreXiKOis KivelcrBai^ dXX' eXai'- 
KoJs . . . ; — Bk. II., ch. XX., 
§i8. 

' For how can a vine live not 
like a vine but an olive. . . .'" 



N.T. 

iv avTa yap ^afxcv Kai Kivov- 
fxeBa KoX eafiev. — ActS xvii. 28. 

' For in Him we live and 
move and are.' 



25. XaXico. 

This exceedingly common N.T. term is common 
also in E. Sometimes it is used in contrast with 
Xeyco in the sense of ' talk,' * speak,' e.g. : — 

N.T. 

^Irjcrovs eXdXrjcrev toIs o)(\ois 
KOI Tols ixaOrjTois avTOv Xeycov. 
— Matt, xxiii. i. 

* Jesus spoke to the multi- 
tudes and His disciples say- 
ing.' 

Sometimes, however, \a\i(o is followed by an 
accusative and it is difficult to distinguish it in 
meaning from Xeyco, e.g. : — 

E. 

\6yovs eXoXfiy npenovras 



E. 

XtiXei (Teavra. . .dya>va avro 
Xeye.— Bk. iv!, ch. iv., § 26. 

'Talk to thyself. ..call it 
a contest.* 



dv8pl dyaOm ' eird /xot Xc'ycts. — 

Bk. IV., ch. ix., § 8. 

' Thou wast speaking words 
befitting a good man ; then 
thou dost tell me.' 



N.T. 

oflTtt 6 vofios Xc'yft Tols iv ra 
v6[x(o \a\el. — Rom. iii. 19. 

* Whatsoever the law says 
it speaks to those who are in 
(the control of) the law.' 



26. XetTTft). 

This Verb, when used in the active voice in N.T., 



VERBS. 



77 



always has the intransitive sense of * be lacking.* 
It is similarly used in E., e.g. : — 



N.T. 

croi XetTret.- 



-Luke 



en ej/ 
xviii. 22. 

' There is still one thing 
lacking to thee.' 



E. 
Tt (Toi XeiVa ; — Bk. II., ch. 
xiv., § 19. 

* What is lacking to thee ? ' 
aoi ovv TovTo Xeinei. — Bk. 

III., ch. ii., §8. 

* This then is lacking to 
thee.' 



27. XeLTOvpryio). 

Once in N.T. this term is used in a non-religious 
sense (the religious sense being found in the re- 
maining passages in which the term is used, Acts 
xiii. 2, Heb. x. ii): in a similar way the term is 
employed at least once in E. : — 



E. 

Tw ovTL Oavixaarov i(TTL 
(^iKelv Trpayixa, a rocravra 
XetTovpyovfxep kuO' €KdaTr]v 
i]fiepav. — Frag. Diss. 23. 

' It is really wonderful that 
we should love a task to 
which we render such service 
every day.' 



N.T. 

d(fietKov(nu Koi iv to7s aapKi- 
Kols \€iTovpy?)a-ai avrois. — 
Rom. XV. 27. 

' They owe it to them also 
to serve them in carnal 
things.' 



28. TrapaKovo). 

Once in N.T. this term seems to be used in the 
Classical sense of * overhear,' viz. Mark v. 36. In 
one other passage in N.T. the term occurs twice in 
the sense of ' pay no heed to,' a meaning not found 
before the time of P«lybius, at least in authors ; in 



yS EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



the same sense the term 
E.:— 

E. 

fX(HVj]ao Tivas crvix^ovXovs 
7rape\aj3es Koi rivcop napa- 
Kovaeis dir€i6rj(ras. — Ench. 
xxxii., § 2. 

' Remember whom thou 
hast taken as counsellors 
and to whom thou wilt pay 
no heed if thou disobey.' 

29. TToieo), TTpdaao). 

Where these terms are used together in E. and 
in N.T. it seems difficult to apply the distinction 
recognized in Classical Greek, that Troteco means 
* do/ ' accomplish,' Trpao-aco ' practise/ * act/ e.g. : — 



is found at least once in 
N.T. 

edv Be irapaKovar] avTWP 
eiTTuu TTJ €KKXr]oia • edv be. koi 
Tijs eKKXrjaiai napaKovaj] . . . — 
Matt, xviii. 17. 

' But if he shall have paid 
no heed to them, tell it to the 
Church ; but if he shall have 
paid no heed even to the 
Church. . .' 



E. 

et Ti pi) TTOielv ede\j]S, prj 
TTotfi avro, oAX' eBiaov uXXo 
TL npi'tTTeiv puXXou uvT avToii. 
— Bk. II., ch. xviii., § 4. 

(Understanding cktikov 
from the previous clause,) 

' If thou wouldst not make 
anything habitual, do not do 
it, but become accustomed 
to practise ' {or ' do ') ' rather 
something else instead of it.' 

oTiiv TL diayvovs, on TTOL-qreov 
earl, TroujSy ptjdenuTe (pvyrjs 
ocpOijvai 7rpu(raa>v auro. — 
Ench. XXXV. 

Whenever thou doest any- 
thing, assured that it ought 



N.T. 
nds yap 6 (jjavXa rrpdaacop 
piael TO (fids Koi ovk ep-)(eTUi 

TTpOS TO (f)a)S. . .6 de TVOlCdV T))l> 

dXijOeiav epxeTUi npos to c}mu)s. 
— John iii. 20, 21. 

' For everyone who prac- 
tises ' (or ' does ') ' evil hates 
the light and comes not to 
the light . . . but he who does 
the truth comes to the light.' 

ov ydp o SeXco TovTo rrpdaaui, 

(iXX' O piad TOVTO TTOtCd. 6t de 
O ov OeXo) TOVTO TTOtW ... — 

Rom. vii. 15, 16. 

* For what I would not, 
this I practise ' (or ' do '), 
' but what I hate, this I do. 



VERBS. 



79 



E. 

to be done, never shun being 
seen to practise' (<?r'do') 'it.' 



N.T. 
Now if what I would not, 
this I do...' 

Also John V. 29, Rom. ii. 3, 
&c. 
30. iTpO(je^(o. 

Twice in N.T., and at least three times in E., this 
word is followed by firj and the subjunctive : — 

E. 

fv rw TVfpnraTelp KaOi'mep 
TTpoaex^is, fi^ (m^Tjs tjXai . . . 

OVTU> 1Tp6(T€\€, pt} KCU TO TjyC' 

poviKov ^\d'^T]s TO aeavTOv. — 
Ench. xxxviii. 

' As in walking thou dost 
take care lest thou tread 
upon a nail ... so take care, 
lest thou harm also thy ruling 
faculty.' 

Also Ench. xvi. 



N.T. 

Sia TOVTO Set 7repi(raoT£p(o^ 
Trpoae^eiv rjpas to7s aKova- 
Oe^aiv, prj ttot€ irapapvatpev. — 
Heb. ii. i. 

'Therefore we must pay 
more abundant heed to the 
things that were heard, lest 
perchance we drift away.' 

Also Luke xxi. 34. 



31. aravpoco. 

This common N.T. word for * crucify,' apparently 
not used in this sense before the time of Polybius, 
is so used at least once in E. : — 

et, yap (navpoyOrjvai 6ek€L<i, etcBe^ai koI 7]^ei 6 
aTavpcx;. — Bk. II., ch. ii., § 20. ' For if it is cruci- 
fixion that thou wouldst have, wait, and the cross 
will come." 

32. OTlXpW. 

The use of this Classical word in E. does not cor- 
respond to its use in N.T. In E. it is employed to 
describe Socrates' personal cleanliness ; — 



80 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



^coKpari]^ oXiyaKif; iXovero. — 'AWa eariX/Bev 
avTov TO (7(o/j,a, — Bk. IV., ch. xi., § 19. * Socrates 
seldom bathed.' ' But his person looked clean.' 

The use in E. of the Adjective aTiXirvo^, however 
(not found in N.T.), corresponds to the solitary use 
of the Verb in N.T. :— 



IfiaTiBia o-rtXTrm. — Bk. IV., 
ch. vi., § 4. 
* Gay clothes.' 

eaBrjra eTTideiKvveij/ OiXeis 
(TTtXirvrjv. — Bk. IV., ch. ix., § 7. 

' Thou wouldst display fine 
clothing.' 



N.T. 

(Referring to the Trans- 
figuration.) 

Ka\ TCI Ifidria avTov cyevero 
arCK^ovTa Xev/ca Xiav ... — 
Mark ix. 3. 

' And H i s garments became 
glistening, exceeding white.' 



33. (JVp(0. 

In the sense of ' drag by force ' this word is found 
in comparatively late Greek, not being so used 
before the time of Theocritus. 

It is so used in N.T., and at least twice in E. : — 



E. 

Ibov (TVpi) (Is TO dcO-flOiTT}- 

piov. — Bk. I., ch. xxix., § 22. 

'See, thou art being 
dragged to prison.' 

Also § 23 of the same 
chapter. 



N.T. 

crvpcov T€ avdpas Koi yvvoLKas 
rrapebiSov els (pvXaKtjv. — Acts 
viii. 3. 

'And haling men and 
women was committing them 
to prison.' 

Also Acts xvii. 6. 

34. vTrdp^o). 

In the Expositor for December 1912, p. 564 
(* Lexical Notes from the Papyri '), it is stated 
that * the idea of falling back upon a " basis," and 
hence of continuity with a previous state, which 



VERBS. 



8i 



originally belonged to this verb, seems to have 
gradually faded in later Greek.' Evidence of this 
maybe found in N.T. and in E., where often vTrdp- 
X€iv cannot be distinguished in meaning from ehai. 
Probably the full force of the verb is found in 
Phil. ii. 6 : 09 eV fiopcpfj @€oO, ' Who, being (to start 
with) in the form of God,' and possibly in Bk. IV., 
ch. ix., § 6 : uTrTjp^e? alSrjfMov Kal vvv ovkcti, elf 
'thou wast — to start with (.?) — modest, and now 
thou art so no longer.' 

But the opposite is the case in the following 
examples : — 



E. 

norepov 5' rj^t] croi vnap^et 
TOVTOf TO fir} elvai iXeov a^iop^ 
rj ov)(^ vrrdpx^t ; — Bk. IV., ch. 
vi., § 2. 

*Art thou now in such a 
condition as not to need pity, 
or art thou not ? ' 

Also Stob. II, 24. 



N.T. 

aKov(o a-)(icrp.aTa iv vp.lv 
vndpxfiP' — I Cor. xi. 18. 

' I hear that there are 
divisions among you.' 

(With this we may com- 
pare I Cor. i. II : eSrjXmStj 
yap pot nepL vpoov, . .otl epides 
iv vplv (la-iv.) 

Also Luke viii. 41, xvi. 23, 
&c. 



35. xo/JTafw. 

This term was employed from the time of Hesiod 
onwards to denote the feeding and fattening of 
cattle, and in Classical times was sometimes applied 
vulgarly to human beings ; in this latter sense it is 
regularly used in E. and in N.T., e.g. : — 



E. 
orav \opTaaBriTf arjpepov, 
KciOrja-Bf K\dovTes nepl m-fjs 



N.T. 

e(f)ayov TrdvreSf Kol fx^P' 
Tdadrjaav. — Matt. xiv. 20. 
G 



82 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
avpiov, TToBcu (f)dyr)T€. — Bk. I., 
ch. ix., § 19. 

*When you have eaten 
your fill to-day, you sit weep- 
ing about to-morrow, how 
you shall get food.' 

Also Bk. III., ch. xxii., 
§ 66 ; Frag. Diss. 23. 



N.T. 

* They all ate and were 
filled.' 

Also Matt. XV. 33, Luke vi. 
21, &c. 



B. — Verbal Forms. 

I. Verbs in -fxi with endings of Verbs in -ay. 

This is a fairly common usage in E. and in N.T 
We append illustrations : — 

a. For Classical avviarij/iic. 

N.T. 



Toiyapovv ijp^^ovro npos av 
TOP a^iovvres (f)iko(r6(j)ois vn 
avTov (TVcrTaBrjvat kukcIvos 
dnriyep Koi (rvvLcrTavev. — Bk. 
III., ch. xxii., § 22. 

' So they used to come to 
him asking to be recom- 
mended by him to philoso- 
phers, and he used to take 
and recommend them.' 



13. For Classical heUvv^i. 



dpxofieOa noKtv €avTov9 avv- 
lo-rdueiv ; — 2 Cor. iii. i. 

' Are we beginning again 
to recommend ourselves ? ' 

Also 2 Cor. X. 12, &c. 



ravTo. fioi deiKvve. l8ov 8clk- 
vvay, (Prjaiv, dvaXvaco aoi <tvK- 
\oyi(TixovS' — Bk. III., ch. 
xxvi., §§ 18, 19. 



N.T. 
OTTO TOTC ^p^aro 'Irjaovs 
XpiaTos heiKvvdv rols fxaOijrali 
avTov on 5ei... — Matt, xvi 
21. 



VERBS. 



S3 



E. 

* Show me these things. 
" See, I do show them," he 
says. " I will solve syllogisms 
for thee."' 



N.T. 

*From that time beg a 
Jesus Christ to show to H'u 
disciples that He must. . .' 

Also John ii. i8. 



Also (for diroWvo)) Bk. IV., ch. ix., § 9, 3rd. pers 
pi. ; John xii. 25, 3rd pers. sing. 



2. rj/jbijv, r;?. 

The forms are common in E. and in N.T. for the 
Classical ?;, r/aOa : the latter term, however, occun 
twice in N.T. (Matt. xxvi. 69, Mark xiv. 6y) com 
pared with five instances of 779. We append 
instances : — 



E. 

€L Tivos avTcou dovXos fffJ-TjU 

. . . — Bk. II., ch. XX., § 29. 

' If I had been the slave of 
one of them.' 

eiro (TKcvdpiov fX€v el r/s ovtco 
aaupov... — Bk. IL, ch. iv., 

§4. 

' Then if thou hadst been 
a vessel of such poor quality 



N.T. 

KaO^ fifiepav rjfxr)V irpos Vftaj 
iv Tw tfpw btbatTKoiv. — Marl 
xiv. 49. 

' I was daily with you ir 
the Temple teaching.' 

ei 17s a)8e ovk av p,ov inridauei 
6 d8eX(f)6s. — John xi. 32. 

' If Thou hadst been here 
my brother would not havt 
died.' 



3. oiSafjiev. 

The Classical tarfiev seems to occur but once ii 
E. — Bk. IL, ch. xvii., § 13 ; it never occurs in N.T 
On the other hand, olhajjuev is the regular term ii 
E., and always appears in N.T. as the 1st perso; 
plural of olha^ e.g. :-* 

G 2 



84 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

ovK o'ldafieVy el eart ris At^/xj^- 
rr)p ^ Kopr} tj UXovtcov. — Bk. 
11., ch. XX., § 32. 

* We do not know if there 
is any Uemeter or Kore or 
Pluto.' 



N.T. 

f]fM€7s o'idafieu on fxcra^e- 
^rjKapfV e/c rov Oavarov els rrju 
CoiTjv. — I John iii. 14. 

* We know that we have 
passed out of death into 
life.' 



4. -V' 

Both in N.T. and in E. this is the ending for the 

2nd person singular middle and passive, not only 

in the subjunctive but also in the indicative (never 

-ei), e.g. :— 



E. 


N.T. 


eHno^ia6r)(rr}y TrevBijCTeis, ra- 


ovbeu diTOKijivT] ; — Matt. 


paxSfja-rj.fie^yl^r].. .— Ench. i.. 


xxvi. 62. 


§3. 


' Answerest Thou nothing ? ' 


'Thou wilt be hindered, 




thou wilt lament, thou wilt 




be disturbed, thou wilt 




blame...' 





5. -rcoaav. 

This is the ending, not the Classical -tcov, for the 
3rd person plural of the imperative active in E. and 
in N.T., e.g. : — 

N.T. 
e^ovaiv Mcovcria Kat rovs 
TTpocfirjTas ' dKovcraTcoaav avTcov. 
— Luke xvi. 29. 

' They have Moses and the 
prophets ; let them hear 
them.' 

6. aKovaw. 

This form is used for the future, instead of the 
Classical aKovaoixai, at least once in E. and three 



ovToi (re 01 biaXoyicrpoi fxfj 
6Xi^€Toiaav. — Ench. xxiv., § i. 

' Let not these reasonings 
distress thee.' 



VERBS. 



85 



times in N.T. It is true that the middle form 
occurs four times in N.T., but all the instances are 
found in Acts. Of these, however, one — iii. 22 — is 
a quotation from LXX., and one — xvii. 32 — occurs: 
in the words of the culture-loving Athenians to St. 
Paul ; two instances only — xxi. 22, xxviii. 28 — are 
thus left to St. Luke himself, and him we know to 
be a genuine Greek, who might on occasion use the 
Classical form. 

We append illustrations of the non-Classical 
form : — 

N.T. 

ot V€Kpo\ aKovaovaiv rfjs 
(pcovrjs Tov vlov Tov Qeov. — • 
John V. 25. 

* The dead shall hear the 
voice of the Son of God.' 

Also John V. 28, Acts xxviii , 
26 (quot. from LXX.). 
7. ylvofiai. 

This form, instead of the Classical r^uyvofiaiy is 
found in E. and in N.T., e.g. : — 



E. 

irons /x' aTToSe'^eTat, vrtos' /xou 
aKova-ei ] — Bk. II., ch. xiii., 

§17. 

' How will he receive me, 
how will he hear me ? ' 



fiauOdveiv eKao-ra ovr(o OeXetv 
o)s yluerai. irias bk yiverai, ; — 
Bk. I., ch. xii., § 15. 

*To learn to will that all 
things should happen as they 
do. How do they happen ? ' 

So too yivcocTKco for Classical yiypuyo-Kco. 

8. Omission of Augment. 

Occasionally examples of this occur. We give 
one example from dcich work : — 



N.T. 

Koi yiverai to. ea-xara rod 
av6pu>7TOv CKeiuov xeipova rSav 
TTpoDTav. — Matt. xii. 45. 

'And the last state of that 
man becomes worse than the 
first.' 



86 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 
E. 



ovxf- yap 7r€7rpaK€i avrov eoy 
nXprja-Tov ; — Bk. I., ch. xix., 
§ 22. 

* Had he not sold him as 
useless ? ' 



N.T. 

T] re 6a\a(Tcra dvcpovpcyaXov 
TTi'iOUTos dieyeipero. — John VI. 
1 8. 

'And the sea was rising 
because a great wind was 
blowing.' 



C. — T/ie Use of the Perfect Tense. 

I. There are instances in which this tense denotes 
an abiding result i e.g. : — 

E. 

av px] (Tx^s, i^c\evarj ' rjvoi- 
KTai Tj Bvpa. — Bk. I., ch. ix., 
§ 20. 

' If thou dost not get it ' 
(I.e. food), 'thou wilt go out 
(of life) ; the door is open.' 

avuyv(OTe to S€vocf)ci>vTos 
^vpnoa-iov Kat o>\re(r6e Troo-a? 
pdxcis diciXeXvKe. — Bk. II., 
cli. xii., § 15. 

'Read Xenophon's "Sym- 
posium" and you will see 
how many controversies he 
has ended.' 

2. But sometimes it seems impossible to distinguish 
this tense from an Aorist in meaning, e.g. : — 



N.T. 

oyjreaOe top ovpavov oVf toyora. 
— John i. 51. 

' You will see the heaven 
(standing) open.' 

Kill iv TO) vofiw de r(o v^ctfpco 
yeypanrai on fiuo dv6p<ii7r(OP /; 
p,npTvpia dXrjdrjs €(TTiu. —John 
viii. 17. 

' Now even in your law it 
stands written that the testi- 
mony of two men is true.' 



E. 
KaOelKe rrjv K6p.r]v, dpeiXij({)e 
rpi^oivay yvpvbv deiKPvei top 
W/40I/. — Bk. IV., ch. viii., § 34. 

' He lets his hair grow, he 



N.T. 

Kat eiprjKa avrw, Kvpie pov, 
arv oi8as. — Rev. vii. 13. 

' And I said to him, " My 
lord, thou knowest." ' 



VERBS. 



87 



assumes the (philosopher's) 
cloak, he bares his shoulder.' 
(Here a Gnomic Aorist might 
easily be substituted for the 
Perfect.) 



N.T. 

(Here a Narrative Aorist 
might well be substituted for 
the Perfect, parallel with 
elirev of V. 14.) 

Similarly e'lprjKe. — 2 Cor. 
xii. 8. 



It becomes the harder to distinguish between the 
two tenses when they are used in close association, 
either in the same sentence or in reference to the 
same act or circumstances, e.g. : — 

E. 



KeKXfLKC T^v Bvpav, ea-raKcv 

TiVa npo TOV KOlTOtVOS. — Bk. 

III., ch. xxii., § 14. 

' One shuts the door, place« 
someone before the apart- 
ment.' 

ri iy€v€TO ; to tvKoiov a7ra)Xe- 
To . . . TL yeyovep ; els (l)v\aKfjv 
dnrjxOn' — Bk. III., ch. viii., 

§5. 

* What has happened ? 
The ship is lost. . .what has 
happened ? He has been 
taken off to prison.' 

Also Bk. II., ch. xviii., 
§ 8 (jrinavTai . . . oTTOKarc'crri^), 
&c. 



N.T. 

6 ra nivre roXavra \n^a>v . . . 

6 TO €V ToXaVTOV eiX7/(|)fa)$'. — • 

Matt. XXV. 20, 24. 

* He that received the five 
talents, ... he that received 
the one talent.' (It may be 
however that although the 
Aorist participle is used of 
the one-talent slave in v. 18, 
it is changed to the Perfect 
in v. 24 because the talent 
remained in the condition 
in which it was given to the 
slave.) 

a'7V€\6(tiv TveivpaKfv rravTa oara 
(Ix^v KoX r)y6pa(r€v avTov. — 
Matt. xiii. 46. 

' He went away and sold 
all that he had and bought 
it.' 

Also Rev. viii. 5, &c. 



CHAPTER VI. 

Adverbs and Prepositions. 



I. avcodev. 

This Adverb is used 
once in E., and in N.T. 
probably : — 

E. 

ov OeXeis airojiaOelv, et bv- 
varov, Tcavra ravra Kol avaOev 
up^aaOai crvvaiadavoyLfvos . . . ; 
— Bk. II., ch. xvii., § 27. 

'Art thou not willing to 
unlearn, if possible, all these 
things and begin again con- 
vinced . . . ? ' 



in the sense of * again * 
once certainly and twice 

N.T. 

TTco? emcTTpecfieTf TrdXtv eVt 
ra dcrOcvi] kol 7TTa>)(d aToix^la, 
ois TToXiv ava>6€V dovXeixrai 
^eXere ; — Gal. iv. 9. 

' How are you turning 
back to the weak and beg- 
garly elements, to which you 
are willing to be enslaved 
again ? ' 

Also (probably) John iii. 
3,7. 

2. Adverbs denoting ' rest at ' are often used in the 
sense of * motion to.' 



This is common in English to-day. ' Here ' is 
used for ' hither,' ' there ' for ' thither,' * where ' for 
' whither.' We append examples from E. and 
N.T. :— 

SS 



ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 



89 



a. aWa'X^ov. 

E. 

oKKa aXKov aKKa-)(ov eTrcjine. 
— Bk. III., ch. xxiii., §22. 

*But he used to send 
different people to different 
teachers.' 



^e. 



E. 



IIU fX €K€l TrefXTTrjSj OTTOV . . . 

— Bk. III., ch. xxiv., § loi. 

' If thou send me thither, 
where. . . ' 



7. OTTOV. 



E. 



OTTOV ap aiTeXdayj eVfi fioi 
KoXcds caTiu. — Bk. IV., ch. 
vii., § 14. 

* Whither I shall have 
gone away, there it will be 
well for me.' 



N.T. 

aycifiep aXXaxov eh raj e;(o- 
fxevas KoifionoXeis. — Mark i. 
38. 

' Let us go elsewhere into 
the neighbouring towns.' 



N.T. 

fierd^a evOev e/cet. — Matt, 
xvii. 20. 

'Remove from here to 
yonder place.' 



N.T. 

Kol OTTOV iyoi virdyco oldare 
TTjv 686v. — John xiv. 4. 

'And whither I go you 
know the way.' 



TTOV. 



Kol TTOV (fivy(0 TOP ddpuTop ; 

— Bk. I., ch. xxvii., § 9. 

' And whither am I to flee 
from death ? ' 



N.T. 

TTOV ovTos fieWei TTOpfveaOai 
ort. . . ; — John vii. 35. 

'Whither shall this man 
go that . . . ? ' 



3. Sihe. 

This term is sometimes used in the sense of 
* here ' or ' hither,' e.g. : — 

a. In the sense oW here.' 



90 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 



N.T. 

Kvpie, KoXov icTTLV r)ixas code 
€Lvai. — Matt. xvii. 4. 

'Lord, it is good for us to 
be here.' 



a)Se T} ttoXXt; Tvpo(To\r] Koi 
crvvTaaii. — Bk. III., ch. xxii., 
§105. 

' Here is most of his atten- 
tion and apphcation.' 

/S. In the sense of ' hither.' 

E. N.T. 

80? o>Sf Tr]v irrtadurjv. — Bk. ^\des u)8e npo KUipov fiaaa- 

II., ch. XX., § 30. viaai rjnas; — Matt. viii. 30. 

Bring the soup hither.' ' Hast thou come hither 

to torment us before the 

time?' 

4. Prepositions with similar meanings in E. and 
N.T. :— 

a. dvrL 

This term does not always mean ' in place of ' ; 
but in at least two passages in E. and three in 
N.T. it has the sense of ' for the sake of : — 



E. 

ni/Tl \vXVOV KXeTTTTJS €y(VeTO, 

dvrl Xv^vov uTTKTTOs, livrl Xv- 
Xvov OtjiHoydrjs. — Bk. I., ch. 
xxvii., § 21. 

' For the sake of a lamp 
he became a thief, for the 
sake of a lamp untrust- 
worthy, for the sake of a 
lamp like a wild beast.' 

Also Bk. II.,ch. xiii., § 16. 



N.T. 

'irjaovp, OS uvtI ttJs rrpoKci- 
fievrjs nvrS ^."^pas vnepeipev 
(TTavpov aL<r\vv?jS KiiTdcppovij- 
(Tds. — Heb. xii. 2. 

'Jesus, who, for the joy 
that was set before Him, 
endured a cross, despising 
shame.' 

Also Matt. xvii. 27 ; Heb. 
xii. 16 ; and perhaps Matt. 
XX. 28 ; Mark x. 45 {Xvrpop 

ni/Tt TToXXtOJ/). 



Apparently, in view of the above, it is unsafe to 



ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 



91 



build up the ' Vicarious ' Theory of the Atonement 
on the meaning of a Preposition. 

IB. ek. 

This term is sometimes used in the sense of * in/ 
e.g. :- 

N.T. 

finvoycvfis Qeos 6 lov els top 
koXttov tov TTUTpos eKc^vos e^rj- 
yrj(raTo. — John i. 1 8. 

' God only-begotten, who 
is in the bosom of the 
Father, He hath declared 
Him.' 



Oft aVTOV KOVKKOVflLOV, UTTOV 

TO depfiop 7roir}aei t(o TratSto), 
IV avTO Xovarj els (TKacliTjv. — 

Bk. HI., ch. xxii., §71. 

' He must have a kettle, 
in which he will warm the 
water for the child, that he 
may wash him in a basin.' 

Also Bk. III., ch. xviii., 
§5. 

7. iv. 



Conversely this term, as a development of the 
* pregnant construction,' is sometimes used in the 
sense of ' into,' e.g. : — 



N.T. 

eldev '2ifia)va k(u ^Avdpeap 
TOP d8€\(f>op St/icoi^op dn(pi- 
^dWoPTUs eV Trj BaXuaaa. — 
Mark i. 16. 

' He saw Simon and 
Andrew, Simon's brother, 
casting a net into the sea.' 

Also Rom. i. 23 {tJWa^ap 
TTjP 8u^ap . . .€P opoioipaTi ciko- 
pos. . .). 
B. TTUpd, 

(I.) Followed by the Accusative, twice in N.T. 
and often in E., the«term means 'because of : — 



Kal pvp iv 'Po) fit] d.P€p)(r], ort 
So/cfi iTOi. — Bk. I., ch. xi., 
§32. 

'And now thou art re- 
turning to Rome, because 
it seems good to thee.' 

Also Bk. II., ch. XX., § 33 
{airfXOeiv ip fiaKavelo)). 



92 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

av Se Tis aTv\fj, fi€fivr}ao on 
Trap* avTou drvxel. — Bk. III., 
ch. xxiv., § 2. 

' Now if any man be un- 
happy, remember that it is 
his own fault.' 

Also Bk. IV., ch. xii., § i, 
&c. 



N.T. 

eav eiTTi] 6 novs "On ovk eljxl 
X^^pj OVK elui €K Tov (ra)[xaTos, 
ov Trapa tovto ovk ecrnv €K tov 
o-oapctTos. — I Cor. xii. 15. 

' If the foot shall have said, 
" Because I am not a hand, 
I am not of the body," it 
is not therefore not of the 
body.' 

Also I Cor. xii. 16. 

(2.) Followed by the Genitive, it is used in the 
sense of * by ' (of the Agent) once in E. and once in 
N.T. :— 



E. 

TO. dWiWpia oylreTai , . .a>s av 
dldcorai napa tov ^x^vtos e^ov- 
aiav. — Bk. IV., ch. X., § 29. 

'Another man's goods shall 
look to it . . . how they are 
given by the man who has 
authority over them.' 



N.T. 

yevrjaeTai avTols napa tov 
naTpos fJiov tov iv ovpavoTs. — 
Matt, xviii. 19. 

* It shall be done for them 
by My Father who is in 
heaven.' 



e. 7r/)09. 

This term, at least once in E. and three times in 
N.T, is followed by an Accusative of the Person, in 
the sense of * with ' : — 



E. 

ITpOS OP OvbeiS i(TTl (TOV TTl- 

OavdiTepos. — Bk. IV., ch. ix., 

§13. 

'With whom no one has 
greater credit than thou.' 



N.T. 

rrduTa 6e yvp.vd . . . toIs d<p- 
da\po7s avTov, rrpos op Tjpiv 6 
Xoyos. — Heb. iv. 13. 

' But all things are naked 
... to his eyes with whom 
is our reckoning.' 

Also John i. i, 2. 



ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 



93 



f. VTTep. 

Followed by the Genitive, this term does not 
always mean ' on behalf of.' Sometimes it is no 
stronger than irepl in the sense of * about,' 'con- 
cerning,' e.g. : — 



E. 

Tt yap icrri to dno<f}aiv6- 
fievov vnep eKiio-Trjs Tovrtou rSiV 
8vudne<ov . . . ; — Bk. II., ch. 
xxiii., § 7. 

' For what is that which 
gives an opinion concerning 
each of these faculties . . . ? ' 

Also nepl and vnep in 
parallel clauses in the same 
sense : nepl rivos yap (f)o^r)(rrj ; 
. . .aXX' vnep tov crapxiTOS koi 
rfjs KTiaews'^ — Bk. IV., ch. i., 
§§ 82, 83. 

5. Preposition governing 
At least two instances 
TOT£ and dir' apri) and 
tiexpi> wSe) :— 
E. 

yix] (f)dour}(rr)T€ dvBpanco ye- 
povTi l8eLP Oeapia, o p-expt vvv 
ovK elbov. — Bk. II., ch. xix., 
§25. 

' Do not begrudge an old 
man a sight which I have 
never yet seen.' 

Also Bk. III., ch. XX., 
§ 18 : p-expf- 2)(^6. 



N.T. 

ovTos icTTLV vnep ov eyo) elnov 
. . . — John i. 30. 

' This is He about whom I 
said . . . ' 

Also in 2 Cor. i. 8 W. H. 
reads in the text (ov yap 

BeXofxev vp,as dyvoelv^ dbe\- 
(j)oi,) vnep (ttJs BXi-^eoiS rjpwv 
. . .) but nepi in the margin. 



an Adverb. 

of this occur in N.T. (aTro 

two in E. ifjiixpt vvv and 

N.T. 

Koi dno T()T€ eCrjTet evKaipiav 
IvaavTovnapaha. — Matt. xxvi. 
16. 

'And from that time he 
began to seek an oppor- 
tunity for betraying Him.' 

ov p.r) ni<o an apri €k tov- 
TOV TOV yevr)p.aTos Trjs dpneXov 
. . . — Matt. xxvi. 29. 

' I will never again drink 
of this fruit of the vine. . . ' 



94 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



6. fiecro^. 

This Adjective is used as a Preposition govern- 
ing the Genitive four times in N.T. and at least 
once in E. :— ' 



E. 

^oKi KOI (Tov Ka\ Tov Tiaihiov 
fxeaov aypibiov... — Bk. II., 
ch. xxii., § lo. 

' Throw an estate between 
thyself and the child . . . ' 



N.T. 

fieaos vfJ-au (TTTjKCL ov vfiels 
ovK o'ldare . . . — John i. 26. 

* In the midst of you stands 
one whom you know not.' 

Also Matt. xiv. 24 (W. H. 
margin) ; Luke xxii. 55 ; Phil, 
ii. 15 (neuter, not in agree- 
ment). 



CHAPTER VII. 



Conjunctions and Particles. 

I. iva. 

Apart from that for the expression of Purpose, 
there are six different uses of this term : — 

a. To express a Consequence, e.g. : — 



E. 

ei S' ouro) Ka)(f>6s ei Ka\ 
TV(f)}i6s, Iva firj^e top ''Hcfyaicr- 
Tov VTroXafx^dvTjs koXov ^.^XKea 
. . . — Bk. IV., ch. viii., § 21. 

* But if thou art so deaf 
and blind that thou dost 
not suppose even Hephaestus 
to be a good smith. . . ' 



N.T 

Xeyco ovv, firj eirTaLcrav iva 
nea-cofTiv ; — Rom. xi. 11. 

'I say then, "Did they 
stumble so that they fell ? " ' 

(On this Moulton has a 
note in his Proleg.^ p. 207.) 



^. After TToieoj, 

This is similar to the Latin use of facto ut, e.[ 



E. 

t:\vvov avTOf dnoa-nrj^ov, 
TTolrjcrov iva ae ixrjdels dno- 
(rTpe(f)rjTai. — Bk. IV., ch. xi., 
§17. 

' Wash it, rub it, take care 
that no one avoids thee.' 



N.T. 

ovK ebvvaro ovtos 6 dvoi^as 
Tovs 6<p0a\iJLovs TOV TV(f)\ov 
TToirjcrai iva Ka\ ovtos fj-rj 
dizoBdvn ; — John xi. 37. 

' Could not he who opened 
the blind man's eyes have 
prevented also this man from 
dying ? ' 



95 



96 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



7. In a Substantive Clause, e.g. : — 



E. 

"EfaKptxTTjs ovu Iva naOrj ravra 
vn ^ABrjvaicoV' — ■ Bk. I., ch. 
xxix., § 16. 

*That Socrates then should 
suffer these things at the 
hands of Athenians ! ' 



N.T. 

efiov 0p5)pd eariv Iva noirjao) 
TO OfKrifxa Tov nefi'^avTos fic. 
— John iv. 34. 

' My food is to do the will 
of Him who sent Me.' 



B. After verbs denoting a Wish or Command, 

e.g. :— 

N.T. 

^e'Xoj Iva OTTOv (IfA cyo) Ka- 
KelvoL wcriv fxer e/xov. — John 
xvii. 24. 

* I will that where I am 
they also may be with Me.' 

elnov Iva oi \[6oi ovtoi aproi 
yivavrai. — Matt. iv. 3. 

* Command that these 
stones be made bread.' 

TTpoaevxecrBe de 7va fif} yc- 
vrjrai r) c^ivyr) vfj,S>v ;ffi/ia)i/oy 
firjbe cra^^dra. — Matt. xxiv. 
20. 

* But pray that your flight 
be not in the winter nor on 
the Sabbath.' 



E. 

HakXov BeX(o, (f)r)(rivf Iv 
€K€ivos avTo. dcfyeXrjTai fj ij/' 
eyu) fif) nefxyj/co. — Bk. II., ch. 
vii., § 8. 

" I would rather," she 
says, "that he should seize 
it than I not send it." ' 

ypa-^dray trot (KwStKeXXoi'), 
Iva Kpivtjs Trept ra>v p,ov(nKa)v. 
— Bk. III., ch. vii., §30. 

' Let him give thee a com- 
mission to judge of music' 

fvXfcrOai avTovs eSei iva pr] 
BepiaSSxriv prjbenoTe', — Bk. 
II., ch. vi., § 12. 

' Ought they to have prayed 
that they might never be 
reaped ? ' 

e. Introducing a Command, e.g. : — 

E. I N.T. 

aye Iva Sax^po)!/ crrecfiavaB^ 
. . . aye Iva Trjprjaco rrjv epavTOV 
rrpoaipeaiv. — Bk. III., ch. iv., 
§9. 



fKacTTOs Tf)v favTOv yvvaiKa 
ovTcos dyandro) cos favTov, rj de 
yvvTj Lva cf)oj3r)Tai, tov dvdpa. — 

Eph. v. 33. 



CONJUNCTIONS AND PARTICLES. 



97 



E. 

* Come let Sophron be 
crowned . . . Come let me 
preserve my choice.' 

av 7rT(i))(6v VTioKpivaa-Bai ae 
0(\r], Iva Koi TOVTov ev(pvci)s 
vTTOKpLvrj. — Ench. xvii. 

*If it be his will that thou 
shouldst act a poor man, act 
even him naturally.' 



N.T. 

'Let each man love his 
wife even as himself, but let 
the wife reverence her hus- 
band.' 

(This usage seems to be 
found in the following pas- 
sage :— ) 

TOVTo Xeyo) Lva fxrjbels Vfias 
napaXoyi^rjTac Iv -niOavoKoyia. 
— Col. ii. 4. 

'This I mean : let no one 
delude you by persuasiveness 
of speech.' 



f. In the sense of * because,' e.g. 



yiKoiov ovv, ti/' aWos viKqar) 
KoifjLtpbwv, efxe /SXavrrefr^at. — 
Bk. UL, ch. iv., § 10. 

* It is ridiculous, then, that 
I should be hurt because 
another man wins the victory 
as comedian.' 



N.T. 

'A/3/jaa/A . . . rjyaWtdcraTo Iva 

John viii. 56. 

' Abraham . . . rejoiced to 
see my day.' 

Also (so Expos. Gr. Test., 
vol. v., p. 439), 

vai, Xeyec to TrveO/xa, Iva 
avarrarjaovTai €K rav Kontou 
avTcov. — Rev. xiv. 13. 

'"Yea," saith the Spirit, 
"for they (shall) rest from 
I their toils." ' 

2. irXriv. 

This term sometimes occurs as a Conjunction 
with the same sense as that of dWd, Si ' but ' — a 
late usage — e.g. : — • 

H 



EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

SixTKciXop 8e filial KOL away- 
ayelu ravra . . . nXrjv ovk ii8vv- 
arov. — Bk. II., ch. v., § 9. 

' Now it is difficult to blend 
and unite these things . . . 
but it is not impossible.' 



1 N.T. 

ttXj;!/ Xcyco tijuli/ . . . — Matt, 
xi. 22. 

' But I say unto you.' 



3- M- 

In E. and N.T. this Negative very often occurs 
where in Classical Greek ov would be found. 

a. It is used to introduce a question implying a 
doubt, being often combined with t«, e.g. : — 

E. I N.T. 

fxr] TL ovv ^e^aiov 17 r]bovri ; — 1 fir] tl ovtos iariv 6 Xpiaroi ; 

Bk. II., ch. xi., § 20. j — John iv. 29 

' Can pleasure then be a I ' Can He possibly be the 

steady thing ? ' i Christ ? ' 

^. With the Participle, whatever the sense, not 
only — as in Classical Greek — in a Conditional 
sense, e.g;. : — 



(In a Concessive sense.) 

vvv 8e fxr) dvvdixevoL rivfs 
TOP -^(oixbv KaranlveLV avvra^iv 
dyopdaavres eiri^dWovrai ecr- 
6U1V. — Bk. I., ch. xxvi., § 16. 

'But, the fact is, some 
men, although they cannot 
swallow the morsel, buy and 
set themselves to devour a 
treatise.' 



N.T. 
(In a Causal sense.) 
/ij) e'xovTos 5e avrov dno- 
dovvM CKeXevcrev avrov 6 Kvpios 
TrpaBrjvai.. . .—Matt, xviii. 25. 
' But, because he had noth- 
ing wherewith to pay, his 
master commanded that he 
should be sold . . . ' 



CONJUNCTIONS AND PARTICLES. 



99 



7. With the Indicative of a statement, especially 
after a Relative or 6ti, ' because,' e.g. : — 



fxrf yap aop tovto to epyov 
^p aXX' iKfivov. — Bk. II., ch. 
vi., § 7. 

' For this was not thy busi- 
ness but his.' 



N.T. 

6 /XJ7 7n(TTev(ou rjbr] KeKpirai, 
OTi fifj 7r€7rlcrT€VK€V els TO ovofxa 
. . . — John iii. 18. 

* He who beheves not has 
been judged already, because 
he has not believed on the 
name . . . ' 



B, With Infinitives of Verbs of * saying' and 
thinking,' e.g. : — 



E. 

Trepi Bewv 01 p.ev Tives elciu 
(01) XeyovTcs fiTjb^ elvat to delov. 
— Bk. I., ch. xii., § i. 

' In regard to gods there 
are some men who say that 
the Deity does not even 
exist.' 



N.T. 

cV eKeivT) tt] rjfxepa TvpocrrjXOov 
avTM ^addovKoioi, \iyovTes fxfi 
eipai dpaaraa-ip. — Matt. xxii. 

23- 

* On that day there came 
to Him Sadducees, who say 
that there is no resurrec- 
tion.' 

Also Acts xxiii. 8. 



4- CIV- 

a. This is often found in place of idv, e.g. : — 

E. N.T. 

av TL 64\(o^ (jiTjcrip, epa> croC 
Tw KvpLcp. — Bk. I., ch. i., § 20. 

' " If I have a mind to say i 
anything," he says, " I 
tell it to thy master." ' 



will 



Kayoi ap v^coOo) eK Ttjs y^y, 
ndpTas iXKixTco npos ifiuvTop. — 
John xii. 32. 

'And I, if I be lifted up 
from the earth, will draw all 
I men unto Myself.' 

/5. In the sense of 'would 
with riOeXov^ e.g. : — • 

H 2 



it is often omitted 



lOO EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

fjdeXou avTov a.TTo^\r]6r)vai 
Tov Konpapos. — Bk. I., ch. xix., 
§ l8. 

* I could wish that he were 
turned out of the bed- 
chamber.' 



N.T. 

rjOiKov be napuvai npos vpds 
apTi, Koi aXXd^ca rrjv (})(ovriv 

fxov. — Gal. iv. 20. 

'Yea, I could wish to be 
present with you now, and 
to change my voice.' 

5. ISov. 

a. The case for a supposed * Hebraism * is break- 
ing down, for this term is very common in E. as 
well as in N.T., as an Interjection in the sense of 
* behold,' e.g. : — 
E. 

L^oi) vios d^Lepao-Tos, IBov 
Trpea-^vrrjs a^ios tov ipdv kcu 
dvTfpdcrdai. — Bk. IV., ch. xi., 

§35 

' Behold, a young man 
worthy of being loved, behold, 
an old man worthy of loving 
and being loved in return.' 

/3. Sometimes the term is treated as a Verb and 
is followed by an object, e.g. : — 
E. 

oravaXXov (iSj/?) nXovTOvvra, 
Idovj TL dvrl Tovrov e^fts. — 
Bk. IV., ch. ix., § I. 

* Whenever thou seest 
another man in possession 
of riches, see what thou hast 
instead of them.' 

Also Bk. IV.,ch.viii.,§35, 
with accusative. 



N.T. 

Koi Idov nudpes bvo irapur- 
TrjKeicrav avTols iv ca6r]cre(TL 
XevKals. — Acts i. 10. 

'And behold, two men were 
standing by them in white 
clothing.' 



N.T. 

I80V evoiTTiov TOV Oeov otl ov 
^evdopat. — Gal. i. 20. 

' Behold, before God, that 
I he not.' 

Also (possibly), 

I80V vdcop ' TL Koikvei pe 
^aTTTicrOrjvat ; — Acts viii. 36. 

' Behold water. What 
hinders me from being bap- 
tized?' 



CHAPTER VIII. 



Sundries. 

A FEW examples of resemblances between E. and 
N.T. in Syntax remain to be treated. 

I . Accusative Absolute. 

As we might expect, the Impersonals Bokovv and 
Siov are found in E. (in Bk. III., ch. xxvi., § 30, and 
Frag. Diss. 24 respectively), tvxov occurs in E. 
and N.T. in the sense of * perhaps.' (We may 
compare with this the North English dialect 
* happen ') : — 



E. 

6(11/ 8e Koi TavT* edeKijs Kol 
uj^X^tv Koi TrXoureti/, tvxov fiiu 

OuS' aVTOiV TOVTtiiV TCV^T] . , . — 

Ench. i., § 4. 

* But if thou dost want both 
these and command and 
riches, perhaps thou wilt not 
obtain these. . .' 



N.T. 

MciKedoviav yap Siepxoixai, 
TTpos vp-as be rvx^v KarapevS} 
rj Trapaxeipdcrco ... — I Cor. 
xvi. 6. 

* For I pass through Mace- 
donia, but perhaps I shall 
stay or winter with you.' 



2. Accusative — in place of Nominative — and Infini- 
tive. 

There are in E. at least one clear instance of 
this construction and two instances in which the 
Infinitive is omitted. In N.T. there are several 
clear instances. There seems to be no need to 
explain the usage as^ue to Latin influence, because 
lOI 



102 V:PlCT!iTUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



the Accusative in every instance is that of the 
Reflexive Pronoun ; the usage therefore arises as a 
natural development of thought and language. 
We append instances : — 

N.T. 

eycb ifiavTOP ovtto) Xoyi^ofiai 
KnTeLkT]<P(vai — Phil. iii. 13. 

' I count not myself yet to 
have apprehended.' 

Also Rom. vi. 11, Rev. 
ii. 9 (Xe7<")j ^c- 



E. 

ol Tpay(d8ol oltjaovTai iav- 
Tovs eivat Tipoo-coTrela ... — 
Bk. I., ch. xxix., § 41. 

' The tragedians will think 
themselves to be masks.' 

Also (without Infinitive) 
Bk. II., ch. xxi., § 2, Ench. 
xlvi., § I. 



3. Dative — unusual instances. 
a. To express Duration of Time. 
There are several examples of this in E. and 
N.T., e.g. :- 

N.T. 
Kal xpopcp iKavS ovk fVe- 
dvcraro t/xarioj'. — Luke viii. 27. 
' And for a long time he 
had worn no garment.' 



E. 

ToaovTto Se XP"'^? TrapaKe- 
Ka6iKeuai yepovriio ov ttoXXov 
d^iM. — Bk. II., ch. vi., § 23. 

' To have sat so long by 
the side of a good-for-nothing 
old man.' 



/3 To express Motion to a Person, 
(i.) The Dative is very common after Trpoaepxo- 
fjiai in this sense, e.g. : — 



E. 

el fie Tis. . . 77 poa-epx^Tai toIs 
<piXoa6(fiois. — Bk., I., ch. 
XX vi., § 9. 

' Now if anyone . . . comes 
to the philosophers.' 



N.T. 

Tore Trpoa-fpxovTat avTa ol 
fiadrjTtu ^Icodvov. — Matt. ix. 14. 

'Then there come to Him 
the disciples of John.' 



SUNDRIES. 



103 



(2.) It is sometimes found after the simple verb 
epxofiai, e.g. : — 

N.T. 

fieTavorjaov ovv ' el 8e firj^ 
epxojjiai (Toi raxv. — Rev. ii. 1 6. 

' Repent therefore ; but if 
not, I come to thee quickly.' 



E. 

Koi €px]] fiOC KiiTiicrToXas 
TToitja-as o)? cro(p6s . . . ; — Bk. 
II., ch. xxi., § II. 

' And dost thou come to 
me with a show of wisdom 
. . ?' 



4. Plural Verb after Neuter Plural. 

This is usual in E. and N.T. when the dis- 
tributive idea is prominent in the noun, e.g. : — 

N.T. 

TO. npo^ara ra efia rrjs (P(ov?]s 
fiov aKovovaiu^ Kayui yivoi)(TKa> 
avrd, KOI aKoKovOovaiv fioi. — 
John X. 27. 

' My sheep hear My voice, 
and I know them, and they 
follow Me.' 



E. 

ei TrepiarTiiaeLS Xeyeis Tci rre- 
piea-TTjKoTdj TViwra Trepiardo-eis 
elcriv. — Bk. II., ch. vi., § 17. 

'If thou callest the things 
that surround thee circum- 
stances, all things are circum- 
stances.' 



5. Loss of Emphasis. 

This may be seen in the use made in E. and 
N.T. of Diminutives and of Compound Verbs, 
e.g. :— 

a. Diminutives. 
E. 

nT]pl8iov Koi ^vXop Koi yvddoi 
fXfyoKai, — Bk. III., ch. xxii., 

§50- 

' A wallet and staff and 
great jaws.' 

There seems to be no 
point in taking it. as ' little 
wallet ' or ' poor wallet.'^ 



N.T. 

ol §€ eaOiovTcs tja-av uv^pes 
axrel TrevraKicrxiXioL X^P'^^ 
yvvaiKcop koI 7rai8i(ov. — Matt, 
xiv. 21. 

* And those who ate were 
about five thousand men 
apart from women and chil- 
dren.' 



104 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. N.T. 

E. is exceedingly fond of It would surely be un- 

Diminutives : often they reasonable to suppose that 
have no force. only little children were found 

in the crowd. 

Q. Compound Verbs. 

KaracpiXico is a splendid illustration both in E. 
and N.T. :— 



(iypV7rvT](rai ere del, rrepibpa- 
jxfiVy TILS x^'P^s- KaTa(pL\TJ(rai. 
— Bk. IV., ch. X., § 20. 

Thou must watch, run 
about, kiss hands.' 

The point is not on kissing' 
fervently, but on the very 
fact of kissing at all. 



N.T. 

elTrev X"^P^> pa3^et ' f«t ku- 
r€(f)I.Xrj(r€v aiirov. — Matt. xxvi. 
49. 

'He said, "Hail, Master" ; 
and kissed Him. 

We cannot endorse the 
R.V. mg. rendering 'kissed 
him much ' : it is more 
natural to read with R.V . 
text ' kissed ' simply. 



6. Infinitive for Imperative. 

Moulton gives instances of this for N.T. {Proleg., 
p. 179) ; this usage occurs too in E., e.g. : — 

E. N.T. 



ix€ixv?]adcu ovv iv reus Ka- 

OokoV, OTl 01 (ITTOppjJTOl \6yoi. 

. . . — Bk. IV., ch. xiii., § 23. 

' Remember therefore, in 
general, that secret dis- 
courses. . .' 



7r\fju els o ecjyOdcraixcv, rw 
avT(p aroixflv. — Phil. iii. 16. 

' Only whereunto we have 
attained, by the same (rule) 
let us walk.' 



7. Participle for Imperative. 

This usage also occurs at least once in E. and 
occasionally in N.T. (cf Moulton, Proleg,, pp. 180, 
181), e.g.:— 



SUNDRIES. 



105 



E. 

TL OVP llVTlTTOirj TOV oXXoTpioV ; 

del fX€fjLvi]fxa'os o ri arbv Koi ri 
dWorpiov [/cat] ov rapaxdrja-rj. 
— Bk. II., ch. vi., §8. 

' Why then dost thou 
claim what belongs to an- 
other ? Always remember 
what is thine and what is 
another's, and thou wilt not 
be disturbed.' 

This instance is not so 
satisfactory, however, as we 
could wish, because khi is 
omitted by S (Codex Saibau- 
tinus, 1 2th century). The 
omission of kui would natur- 
ally suggest that p,€iJLV7]i.i€vnsbe 
taken as an ordinary Parti- 
ciple. On the other hand, 
the Imperative sense is sup- 
ported by a comparison with 
a passage of similar context 
i:i Ench. i., § 3. — p.ep,vri(xo 
ouu, on edv . . . olr]djjs . . . rd 
dXXoTpui i'Sid, . . . Tapax6i)(Trj 
(v. Teubner Ed., p. 118). 



N.T. 

aTTOCTTVyOVVTfS TO TTOVqpoVy 

KoWoifjievot TO) dyadco . . . to 
auTO els aXkrjXovs cf)povovvT€s. 
— Rom. xii. 9, 16. 

* Abhor that which is evil, 
cleave to that which is good ; 
... Be of the same mind one 
toward another.' 



8. aJcTTC with the Infinitive in Final sense. 

At least three instances of this occur in N.T. and 
one in E. : — 



€1 TavTa ovK efiaOes [pvx] 
S>(TT epyco dei^at, Trpos tl uvtu 
efiaOei ; — Bk. I., ch. xxix., 
§35. ^ 



N.T. 
e KaTqpyrjdTjfxev utto 



vvvi 

TOV vofioVf dnoBavopTfs eV to 
KaTeixofxeBUf ajore ^ovXeveiv 
[^^a?] iv KaivorrjTi rrvevjjiaTos 



I06 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
' If thou didst not learn 
these things to show them in 
practice, why didst thou learn 
them at all ? ' 



N.T. 
Koi ov TToXaiorrfTi ypafifiaros. 
— Rom. vii. 6. 

' But, the fact is, we have 
been discharged from the 
law, having died to that 
wherein we were being held, 
that we might serve in new- 
ness of spirit and not in old- 
ness of letter.' 

Also Matt, xxvii. i, Luke 
XX. 20. 



CHAPTER IX. 

Resemblances between Epictetus and the 
New Testament in Thought and 
Teaching. 

In the preceding pages it has become evident that 
Epictetus was a moral and religious teacher. jR.e- 
_jiiajdkai)le,.parallels may be discovered between the 
Thought and Teaching of Epictetus and those 
found in the New Testament. We append illus- 
trations : — 



I. The Nature and Attributes of God. 
a. God's Essence. 



E. 

vovs, eniCTTrjfXT], \6yos op66s. 
— Bk. II., ch. viii., § 2. 

' Mind, knowledg^e, right 
reason.' 



N.T. 

' In the beginning was the 
Word (Xoyos), and the Word 
was with God, and the Word 
was God.' — John i. i. 

'God is Spirit.' — John iv. 
24. 

13. God's Omnipresence and Omniscience. 



E. 
' The philosophers say that 
we must first learn that God 
exists and that His provi- 
dence directs the vviiole 



N.T. 

' He is not far from each 
one of us.' — Acts xvii. 27. 

' All things are naked and 
open to His eyes, with whom 



107 



I08 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
{npovoel Tb>v oXcov) and that 
it is impossible to hide from 
Him not only our actions, 
but even our thoughts and 
emotions.' — Bk. II., ch. xiv., 
§11. 

'Are they not (the Gods) 
at the same distance from 
everywhere? Do they not 
everywhere equally see what 
is happening ? ' — Bk. IV., ch. 
iv., § 48. 

7. God's Care. 

E. 
*(Zeus) who neglects not 
even one of the smallest 
things.' — Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 

§113. 

* He (6 Qeos) administers 
all things well and neglects 
not the affairs of men.' — 
Bk. III., ch. xxvi., §28. 



N.T. 
is our reckoning.'— Heb. iv. 
13- 

' But concerning that day 
and hour no man knows, 
not even the angels of 
heaven, not even the Son, 
but the Father only.' — Matt. 
xxiv. 36. 



N.T. 

'Are not two sparrows 
sold for a farthing? And 
one of them will not fall to 
the earth without your 
Father. But even the hairs 
of your head are all nutn- 
bered.' — Matt. x. 29, 30. 



S. God the Answerer of Prii^er. 



E. 

* Ask not from Gods those 
things which thou desirest, 
but seek this from Gods, 
that thou mayst be set free 
from desire itself. Then 
shall the Gods hearken to 
thee when thou prayest not 
for the pleasant but for the 
good things. And then shall 



N.T. 
' You ask and you do not 
receive because you ask 
wrongly that you may spend 
it on your pleasures (i}6oi/ats).' 
— James W. 3. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. IO9 



F. 
they give to thee the good 
things when thou rejoicest 
not in pleasure (ridovfj), but 
in virtue.'~Cod. Vat. 3. 

6. God in Man. 



* When you have shut your 
doors and made it dark 
within, remember never to 
say that you are alone ; for 
you are not, but God is 
within and your genius 
(5ai/xQ)^).' — Bk. I., ch. xiv., 

§§ 13, 14- 

' It is in thyself that thou 
dost carry Him (God) and 
thou dost not perceive that 
thou profanest Him by 
unclean thoughts and im- 
pure actions . . . and when 
God Himself is within you 
(e(rQi6ep, cf. Matt. vii. 15) and 
sees and hears everything 
. . .' — Bk. II., ch. viii.. 



N.T. 

' Know you not that your 
bodies are members of 
Christ ? . . . Know you not 
that your body is a shrine 
of the Holy Spirit who is in 
you, whom you have from 
God?' — I Cor. vi. 15, 19. 

' Grieve not the Holy 
Spirit of God.' — Eph. iv. 30. 



§§ 13, i{. 

It is evident that E.'s teaching is pantheistic, but 
the resemblance to that of the New Testament is 
obvious. 

2. Religion — Man's Relation to God. 

a. The Essence of Religion. 

E. N.T. 

*Know that the chief 'He who comes to God 
feature of piety {evae^ias) must believe that He exists 



no EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



towards the Gods is this : 
to have right conceptions 
about them, as existing and 
administering everything 
with goodness and justice, 
and to keep thyself in this 
resolve, to obey them, and 
yield to them in all that 
happens and willingly follow 
them. . . ' — Ench. xxxi., § i. 

/3. God's Will the Standard. 

E. 
' In a word will nothing 



N.T. 

and that He shows Himself 

the rewarder of those who 

diligently seek Him.' — Heb. 

X. 6. 

' Submit yourselves to 
God.' — James iv. 7. 



N.T. 

'The will of the Lord 
come to pass.' — Acts xxi. 14. 

*As Christ's slaves doing 
the will of God with good 
pleasure from the heart.' — 
Eph. vi. 6, 7. 



else than what God wills.' — 
Bk. II., ch. xvii., § 22. 

' For what God wills I 
consider better than what 
I will.' — Bk. IV., ch. vii., 
§20. 

Also Bk. II., ch. vii., § 13 ; 
ch. xvi., § 42. Bk. IV., ch. i., 
§§ 89, 90, 99, &c. 

7. Conversion. 

This has been referred to under the Verb 
tVfo-T/3ec/)ft), p. 73. 
B. Trust in God. 

E. I 

'When you have eaten 
your fill to-day, you sit 
weeping about to-morrow, 
whence you shall get food ! 

{iTodev 4>dyrjT().' — Bk. I., ch. | 
ix., § 19. 1 



N.T. 
'Be not anxious for your 
life, what you shall eat (tl 
(^ayf/Tf).'— Matt. vi. 25. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. 1 1 1 



e. Fellowship with God. 

E. 
* Let any of you show me 
the soul of a man. . .in this 
poor mortal {veKpw) body, 
aiming to have fellowship 
(Koivapias) with Zeus.' — Bk. 
II., ch. xix., § 27. 

f. The Friend of God. 

E. 

*To look up into Heaven 
as the Friend of God (cf)i\ov 

Tov Qeov) fearing nothing of i 

the things that can happen.' i 

— Bk. II., ch. xvii., § 29. j 

The reason of this Friend- 1 

ship seems to be found in j 

§ 22 : ' Will nothing else | 

than what God wills.' i 



N.T. 
' If we shall have said that 
we have fellowship {Koivatvlav) 
with Him ' (Gco's in previous 
verse). — i John i. 6. 



N.T.I 

' Abraham believed God 
. . . and he was called 
"Friend of God" (cfjiXos 
Qeovy — James ii. 23. 

'You are my friends if 
you do what I command 
you.' — John xv. 14. 



7j. Call upon God as Helper. 



E. 
* Remember God, call upon 
Him {eniKaXov) as Helper 
(^orjOov) and Protector, as 
the sailors call upon Castor 
and Pollux in a storm.' — 
Bk. II., ch. xviii., § 29. 



N.T. 

' Everyone who shall have 
called upon {emKaXea-rjTai) 
the name of the Lord shall 
be saved.' — Rom. x. 13. 

'So that with confidence 
we say, "The Lord is my 
Helper (^orjBoi) : I shall not 
fear."' — Heb. xiii. 6. 



0. Thankfulness to God. 

This is found under the Verb evxapiareo), p. 74. 

1. Man's Business. • 



112 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



' In life it was my business 
(epyoi/) to praise (v^velv) God.' 
— Bk. III., ch. xxvi., § 30. 



E. N.T. 

'Teaching and admonish- 
ing yourselves with psalms 
and hymns (u/xi/oiy) and 
spiritual songs, singing 
{a8ouT€s) with grace in your 
hearts unto God.' — Col. iii. 
16. 

Sin and its Consequences. 

a. Sin as Stumbling (Trralco). 



E. 

' No man stumbles on ac- 
count of another's action . . . 
But it was a stumble {tttoI- 
a-fxii) when he (Paris) lost 
the modest, the faithful, the 
hospitable and the decent 
character. When did Achilles 
stumble.^ Was it when Patro- 
clus died? Impossible (/XJ7 
yivoLTo) ; but it was when he 
was angry, when he wept for 
a girl, when he forgot that 
he was there, not to get 
mistresses, but to fight. 
These are human stumbhngs, 
this is the siege, this is an 
overthrow, when the right 
principles are destroyed, 
when they are ruined.' — 
Bk. I., ch. xxviii., §§ 23, 24, 
25- 

p. Sin brings Loss. 
E. 

*What does the adujterer 
lose? The modest, the 
chaste, the decent char- 



N.T. 

' For whosoever shall have 
kept the law wholly but have 
stumbled in one point, is be- 
come guilty of all.' — James 
ii. 10. 

' For in many things we 
all stumble. If any man 
stumbles not in word he is 
a perfect man, able also to 
control his whole body.' — 
James iii. 2. 

It can be seen that E.'s 
exposition of 'stumbling' is 
largely in accord with N.T. 
thought. 



N.T. 
St. Paul speaks of those 
who reject Christ as rol? 
aTToXXvfieVoiS' (i Cor. i. 18). 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. II 3 



acter ; the citizen, the neigh- 
bour. What does the angry 
man lose ? Something else. 
The coward ? Something 
else. No man is wicked 
(fcaKos) without loss or dam- 
age.'— Bk. XL, ch. X., §§ 18, 
19. 

' Never is a man guilty 
{a^aprduei) in one instance 
and a sufferer in another.' 
— Bk. III., ch. xviii., §5. 



7. Punishment follows Sin. 



N.T. 

' Unto the day of judg- 
ment and loss ' {or ' destruc- 
tion ' — aTTcoXeias) ' of impious 
men.'— 2 Pet. iii. 16. 

' The wages of sin {a^apTuis:) 
is death.' — Rom. vi. 23. 



E I 

! 

* Is there not the divine | 
and powerful and inevitable 
law which exacts the greatest 
punishments {KoKda-eis) from 
those who are guilty {ayiap- 
ravouTcov) of the greatest 
offences .? ' — Bk. III., ch. 
xxiv., § 42. 

S. Sin as Slave Master. 



'He is free who lives as 
he likes, who can neither be 
compelled nor restrained nor 
suffer violence, whose pur- 
suits are unhindered, desires 
successful and aversions un- 
incurred. Who then would 
live wrongly {uixapTavoiv) l-m- 



N.T. 

' And these shall go away 
into eternal punishment {k6- 
Xaoriv), but the righteous. . . ' 
—Matt. XXV. 46. 

' The Lord knows how . . . 
to keep unrighteous men 
under punishment (/coXa^o- 
fxevovs) unto a day of judg- 
ment.' — 2 Pet. ii. 9. 



N.T. 

' Our old nature {avQpcavoi) 
was crucified with Him (i.e. 
Christ), that the body of sin 
might be done away, that 
we might no longer be slaves 
{^ovkeveiv) to sin {afiapTia}.^ — 
Rom. vi. 6. 

'The Creation itself also 
I 



1 14 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
No man. Who would live 
deceived, prone to mistake, 
unrighteous (adcKos), disso- 
lute, discontented, dejected 
{raneivos'^)? — No man. No 
man then of those who are 
wicked ((^auXoi/) lives as he 
likes : therefore neither is 
he free (eXev^fpos).'— Bk. IV., 
ch. i., §§ 1-3. 

Also Bk. II., ch. i., § 23 — 
ov^e\s ajxapTdvcov eXevOepos 



N.T. 
shall be delivered from the 
bondage {dovXeias) of corrup- 
tion into the liberty {iXcvde- 
piav) of the glory of the 
children of God.' — Rom. viii. 
21. 

' Everyone who doeth sin 
(ufxapTiav) is slave (SovXos) of 
sin.'— John viii. 34. 



6. Cleanse the Life by the Power of God. 



' Remove by cleansing 
{KiiBapov) thy own evils. 
Cast out from thy mind 
grief, fear, desire, envy, 
malevolence, avarice, effe- 
minacy, intemperance. But 
it is not possible otherwise 
to cast them out, except by 
looking away to God alone, 
by a state of submission to 
Him alone, by being con- 
secrated to His commands.' 
— Bk. II., ch. xvi., §§ 45, 46. 



N.T. 

* Let us cleanse {KaOapl- 
crcofjiev) ourselves from every 
defilement of flesh and 
spirit.' — 2 Cor. vii. i. 

' God . . . cleansing {Ka6a- 
piaas) their hearts by their 
faith {rfj TTiWei)-' — Acts xv. 
8,9. 

' Every branch that bcareth 
fruit He cleanseth {Kudaipci) 
it. . . ' — John XV. 2. 



4. Man's Relation to Others. 
a. Please God rather than Men. 



* For rair^ivos v. next chapter. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. II 5 



E. 

' Whenever thou visitest 
one of those who are in 
authority, remember that 
there is also Another who 
sees from above what is 
happening and that thou 
must please (dpiaKeLv) Him 
rather than the man in 
authority.' — Bk. I., ch. xxx., 
§1. 

' If thou hast ever turned 
to external things with a 
view to wishing to please 
(apeaai) anyone, know that 
thou hast ruined thy scheme 
of life.' — Ench. xxiii. 



N.T. 

'Do I seek to please 
{dpio-Kciv) men ? If I still 
pleased men I should not be 
slave of Christ.' — Gal. i. lo. 

' Finally, brethren, we ask 
and beseech you in the Lord 
Jesus, that, as you have re- 
ceived from us how you 
must walk and please {dpi- 
cTKeiv) God, as you are 
walking — that you abound 
more and more.' — i Thess. 
iv. I. 



(3. Do not Covet. 

E. 

' Why then dost thou claim 
{dvTiTToifj) that which belongs 
to another? Always re- 
member what is thine and 
what is another's and thou 
wilt not be disturbed.' — Bk. 
n., ch. vi., § 8. 

' What is the divine law ? 
To preserve what is our 
own, not to claim {dvri- 
TTOietCT-^ai) what belongs to 
others...' — Bk. II., ch. xvi., 
§28. 



N.T. 

' Had not the /a-w said, 
" Thou shalt not desire (eVt- 
dvfxrjueis) " {or " covet.") ' — 
Rom. vii. 7 ; xiii. 9. 

' I have desired {eTreBviirja-a) 
no man's silver or gold or 
clothing.' — Acts xx. 33. 



7. Rejoice in Another's Success. 



I 2 



Il6 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 
' Does anyone receive 
greater honour {TrpoeTifiijSrj) 
than thou at a festival, in 
compliment, or in being ad- 
mitted to a consultation? If 
these things are good, thou 
must rejoice that he has ob- 
tained them, but if they are 
evil, do not be grieved that 
thou hast not obtained them.' 
— Ench. XXV., § I. 

8. The Danger of Evil Company. 



N.T. 
' In honour (n/x.^) 
ferring one another.' — 
xii. lo. 



pre- 
Rom. 



E. 
* Know that if the com- 
panion be polluted, he that 
converses with him, although 
he may be pure, must be 
polluted with him.' — Ench. 
xxxiii., § 6. 

5. Man's Nature. 

a. Man is God's Son. 

E. 

' We are all originally de- 
scended from God, and God 
is the Father of men ... If 
thou know that thou art son 
of Zeus . . . reason and thought 
in common with the Gods . . . ' 
— Bk. I., ch. iii., §§ 1-3. 

'(Why should not a man 
call himself) a son of God ? 
. . . are not we akin to God 
and have not we come from 
Him?'— Bk. I.,ch.ix.,§§6,i3. 



N.T. 
' Evil company corrupts 
good manners.' — i Cor. xv. 
33- 



N.T. 

' Jesus . . . being son, as was 

supposed, of Joseph, (the son) 

of Heli . . . (the son) of Adam, 

(the son) of God.' — Luke iii. 

23, 38. 

' Your heavenly Father.' 
— Matt. vi. 14, &c. 

' One God and Father of 
all.'~Eph. iv. 6. 

' Man {dvi]p) . . . being the 
Image and Glory of God.' — 
I Cor. xi. 7. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. 11/ 



E. 
' Thou art a distinct portion 
(dnoa-Traarna) of God : thou 
hast a certain part of Him 
in thyself.' — Bk. II., ch. viii., 
§11. 

13. Man's Superiority. 

E. 
' Is a man then in no way 
different from (Sia^epet) ' (or 
'better than') 'a stork?'— 
Bk. I., ch. xxviii., § 19. 



7. The Body. 

(I.) Made of Clay. 



' It (the body) is not thine 
but a fine mixture of clay 
(;rr;Xo$-).' — Bk. I., ch. i., § II. 

' How could He make the 
body of clay {tttjXivov) incap- 
able of hindrance ?' — Bk. IV., 
ch. i., § 100. 

(2.) As Fetters. 

E. 
' That we have the body 
and its possession attached 
to us as fetters (bea-fid) ... we 
can no longer endure being 
tied down (SfSe/xei/ot) with 
this (paltry) body. . .'— Bk. I., 
ch. ix., §§ II, 12. • 



N.T. 

' Are you not of much more 
value (duKpepeTe) than they ' 
(i.e. birds) ? — Matt. vi. 26. 

' Of how much more value 
{dia<pep€Te) are you than the 
birds.' — Luke xii. 24. 



N.T. 

' The first man is of the 
earth earthy (xoi'xos).' — i Cor. 
XV. 47. 

St. Paul adapts the LXX. : 
' And God formed man xovu 
from the earth.' — Gen. ii. 7. 



N.T. 

* Who shall deliver me out 
of this body of death.?' — 
Rom. vii. 24. 

* We who are in the taber- 
nacle ' (i.e. the body) ' groan, 
being burdened (jSapou/ifvot).' 
— 2 Cor. v. 4. 



Il8 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



3. The Soul is Immortal. 
E. 

'In feasts remember that 
thou entertainest two great 
guests, body and soul, and 
what thou shalt have given 
to the body thou dost pre- 
sently lose, but what thou 
shalt have given to the soul 
thou preservest for ever (6ta 
TravTus).^ — Stob. 20. 

6. Conscience. 

(i.) An Active Conscience. 
E. 

' To the Cynic, instead of 
arms and guards ' — as with a 
King — ' Conscience {t6 avp- 
eibos) gives this power ' — of 
reproving and punishing de- 
linquents. — Bk. III., ch.xxii., 
§94. 



N.T. 

* But concerning the resur- 
rection of the dead, did ye 
not read what was said by 
God : " I am the God of 
Abraham and the God of 
Isaac and the God of J acob " ? 
He is not the God of (the) 
dead but of (the) living.' — 
Matt. xxii. 31, 32. 



(2.) A Dull Conscience 
E. 

(To one overcome by 
Temptation.) 

'Thou wilt be reduced to 
so weak and wretched a con- 
dition that afterwards thou 
wilt not even know that thou 
art doing wrong (d/iapravcis), 
but thou wilt actually begin 
to make defences for thy 
conduct.' — Bk. II., ch. xviii., 

§31. 



N.T. 

' In that they (Gentiles) 
show the work of the law 
written in their hearts, their 
Conscience {ttjs avveibrja-eoys) 
bearing witness therewith, 
and their reasonings one with 
another accusing or else 
excusing.' — Rom. ii. 15. 



N.T. 

' But the Spirit says ex- 
pressly that in later times 
some shall fall away . . . 
through the hypocrisy of men 
that speak lies, seared in 
their own Conscience as with 
a hot iron.' — i Tim. iv. i, 2. 

' To them that are detiled 
and unbelieving nothing is 
pure ; but both their mind 
and their Conscience are de- 
filed.'— Tit. i. 15. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. 1 19 



(3.) We may note the following parallel con- 
structions : — 



E. 

(ivOpconos crvi'eiSws eavra 
firjdeu aya6bv fxr^re TrenoirjKoTi 
fiTjT ivOvyiovyLevto. — Bk. III., 
ch. xxiii., § 15. 

' A man conscious that he 
has neither clone nor con- 
ceived a good action.' 



N.T. 

ov8ep yap efxavra avvoida 
I Cor. iv. 4. 

' For I am conscious 
nothing against myself.' 



oi 



6. Sundry Points of Conduct and Experience. 
a. Act in a Manner Worthy of God. 



'But if thou hadst been 
Pheidias' statue either of 
Athene or of Zeus, thou 
wouldst have remembered 
both thyself and the artist ; 
and, if thou hadst had any 
sense, thou wouldst have en- 
deavoured to do nothing un- 
worthy of him who fashioned 
thee, nor of thyself, nor to 
appear in an unbecoming 
manner to those who saw 
thee. But now that Zeus 
has made thee, art thou on 
that account careless how 
thou shalt show thyself.? . . . 
Being therefore the formation 
of this artist, dost thou put 
Him to shame.?'— Bk. II., 
ch. viii., §§ 18, 19, 21. • 



N.T. 

' For we are His workman- 
ship (TTotTy/ia), created in 
Christ Jesus for good works, 
which God prepared before- 
hand that we should walk in 
them.' — Eph. ii. 10. 

' Whether therefore you eat 
or drink or do anything, do all 
to the glory of God.' — i Cor. 

X. 31. 

' Love your enemies and 
pray for those who persecute 
you : that you may become 
sons of your Father in 
Heaven, for He makes His 
sun to rise upon evil and 
good and sends rain upon 
righteous and unrighteous.' — 
Matt. v. 44, 45 



I20 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



^. The Adorning of the Inner Man. 

E. 
' Thy excellence lies in the 
rational part {to XoyiKov) : 
this adorn {koo-^h) and beau- 
tify ; leave thy hair (kojut^j/) to 
Him who formed it as He 
willed.'— Bk. III.,ch.i., §26. 



N.T. 
' Whose adorning (KoV/ios) 
let it not be that which is 
outward of plaiting of hair 
(rpixcov) and putting on of 
gold or of clothing, but the 
hidden man of the heart 
(Kapbias). . .' — I Pet. iii. 3, 4. 



7. Do the Good for its own sake. 



E. 
' Knowest thou not that a 
genuinely good {koXos kcu 
dyados) man does nothing for 
the sake of appearance but 
for the sake of having acted 
well.'— Bk. III., ch. xxiv., 
§50- 



N.T. 

(The Contrast — the Scribes 
and Pharisees.) 

' So you also appear out- 
wardly righteous to men, but 
within you are full of hypo- 
crisy and lawlessness.' — Matt, 
xxiii. 28. 



a. Do Right and Fear Not. 



E. 
' When thou dost anything 
from a clear sense that it 
ought to be done never avoid 
the being seen to do it, even 
though most men should 
misunderstand it. For if 
thou art not acting rightly, 
avoid the action itself ; but 
if rightly, why dost thou fear 
those who shall reprove you 
wrongly ? ' — Ench. xxxv. 



N.T. 

' For rulers are not a cause 
of fear to the good work but 
to the evil. And wouldst 
thou not have fear of the 
Authority? Do the good, 
and thou shalt have praise 
from it. . .But if thou do the 
evil, fear.' — Rom. xiii. 3, 4. 



€. How to Speak. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. 121 



(i.) Say only what is Necessary and let Words 
be Few. 

N.T. 

* Slow to speak (XaX^o-at).' 
— James i. 19. 

' Let yours be the " Yes, 
yes " and the " No, no." '— 
James v. 12. 

' Let no profitless ' (or 
' corrupt ') ' word come forth 
out of your mouth, but that 
which is good for building 
up of the need ' (i.e. ' as 
occasion requires')- — Eph. 
iv. 29. 

(v. under aanpos, p. 56.) 



E. 
*Let there be silence for 
the most part or let that which 
is necessary be said (\a\ei- 
cr6(o) and in few words. 
Sometimes, however, when 
occasion calls for it, speak 
(Xe^oi/), but speak sparingly 
... If then thou art able by 
thy own conversation, bring 
over that of the company to 
a fitting subject.' — Ench. 
xxxiii., §§ 2, 3. 



(2.) Swearing is Prohibited. 



E. I 

'Avoid swearing (opKov), \ 

if possible, altogether, but if I 

not, as far as thou art able.' I 

— Ench. xxxiii., § 5. 



N.T. 
* But before all things, my 
brethren, swear not, neither 
by the Heaven, nor by the 
earth, nor by any other oath 
{opKov).^ — James v. 12. 



(3.) Speech to be Wholesome. 



E. 

* But dangerous also is the 
approach to indecent speak- 
ing {alaxpokoylav). When- 
ever, therefore, such a thing 
has happened, if there be an 
opportunity, reprove the man 
that has made the approach ; 
but, if not, by silence and 
blushing and a forbidding 



N.T. 

* Let your speech always 
be with grace, seasoned with 
salt.'— Col. iv. 6. 

* That it may give grace 
to those who hear it.' — Eph. 
iv. 29. 



122 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

E. I 

look {(TKv6f}(07rdacu, cf. Matt, 
vi. 1 6), show thyself to be dis- ! 
pleased by the conversation.' 
— Ench. xxxiii., § i6. i 

Also V. under alaxpoXoyia, p. 17. 



^. Avoid Extravagance. 

E. 

' Provide things relating 
to the body no further than 
the bare need, such as food, 
drink, clothing, a house, 
servants. But everything re - 
lating to show {86^av) and 
delicacy reject.' — Ench. 
xxxiii., § 7. 



N.T. 

(The Prayer.) 

' Give us to-day our bread 
for the coming day.' — Matt, 
vi. II. 



7). The Disadvantage of Riches. 



' Riches (ttXoutos) are not 
among the things that are 
good . . . Riches . . . seduce 
from Tightness of mind (o-co- 
cf)po(ri)vr]s). It is difficult, 
then, for a rich person to be 
right-minded (craxppovclv) or 
a right-minded person rich.' 
— Stob. 10. 



N.T. 

*A rich man {ttKovo-ios) 
will with difficulty enter into 
the Kingdom of Heaven.' — 
Matt. xix. 23. 

' Those who wish to be 
rich (TrkovTelv) fall into a 
temptation and a snare and 
many foolish and harmful 
desires, such as drown men 
in destruction and perdition. 
For the love of money is a 
root of all (kinds of) evils.' — 
I Tim. vi. 9, 10. 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TEACHING. 123 



0, True Humility. 
E. 

So^oj/ 6e fxr)hiis elvai Ka'i 
cldevai firjdev. — Bk. II., ch. i., 
§36. 

'But think that thou art 
nobody and that thouknowest 
nothing.' 

— Advice to a young man. 



I. Fear of Death. 



'Dost thou then consider 
than the origin {K€<pdXaiov) of 
all human evils and mean- 
spiritedness and cowardice 
is not death, but rather the 
fear of death (6 rot) Oavdrov 
(f)6(-ios) ? '— Bk. III., ch. xxvi., 
§38. 



N.T. 

* If any man thinks (SoxeT) 
that he is anything when 
he is nothing {fjt-rjbev) he de- 
ceives himself.' — Gal. vi. 3. 

' If any man thinks (SoKei) 
that he knows (eyi/wfce'mi) 
anything, he has not yet 
come to know it (eyvco) as he 
must (come to) know it.' — 
I Cor. viii. 2. 



N.T. 
'And might deliver all 
those who through fear of 
death (^o/Sw Oavdrov) were 
all their lifetime subject to 
bondage (douXeias).' — Hcb. 
ii. 15. 



K. When Death Comes. 

E. I 

'What then wouldst thou 
be found by Death to be j 
doing ? For my part, I | 
would be found doing some | 
humane, beneficent, public- I 
spirited, noble task.' — Bk. 
IV., ch. X., § 12. I 



N.T. 

* Do you also show your- 
selves ready, for in an hour 
that you think not the Son 
of Man comes. . . Happy that 
slave whom his Master, when 
he comes, will find so doing.' 
— Luke xii. 40, 43. 



X. Contentment. 



124 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



E. 

* Mindful of these things, 
rejoice in what you have 
(rots' napovari) and be content 
(ciydmi) with those things for 
which it is the season (kiu- 
p6s):—Bk. IV., ch. iv., § 45. 

(Even in Prison.) 

E. 
*And then we shall be 
imitators of Socrates, when 
in prison {(f)v\aK^) we are 
able to write hymns of praise 
(naidvas).^ — Bk. II., ch. vi., 
§26. 



N.T. 
' I have learnt in whatso- 
ever state I am therein to be 
content {avTdpKr)s).^ — Phil. 
iv. II. 



N.T. 
(The jailor) ' who, having 
received such a charge, cast 
them (Paul and Silas) into 
the inner prison {(pvXaKrjv) 
and made their feet fast in 
the stocks. Now about mid- 
night Paul and Silas were 
praying and singing hymns 
to God.' — Acts xvi. 23, 25. 
/>6. Repentance. 

With the N.T. fieravoecv ('change the mind') we 
may compare E. : — 

* If thou wouldst be good (ayado^) first believe 
that thou art wicked (KaK6<;)/ Stob. 3. 

7. The Teacher. 

a. The Impartation of Truth. 



* Of the young men it is 
not easy to gain the attention 
{nporpeylrai) of the effeminate 
(paXaKovs) : for it is not easy 
to take cheese by a hook ; 
but the ingenuous (ey^vels), 
even if thou discourage (dno- 



N.T. 
We may compare the use 
of Parables. Those who 
wanted to learn the truth 
would discover it from study 
of the Parables. Those who 
did not want to learn the 
truth would not discover it 



RESEMBLANCES IN THOUGHT AND TF:ACHING. 1 25 



E. 

TpiTTTjs) them, are more eager 
for learning (en fiaWov exou- 
rat Tov Xoyov).^ — Bk. III., 
ch. vi., § 9. 



N.T. 
however plainly our Lord 
spoke, ' because seeing they 
do not see and hearing they 
do not hear nor understand.' 
— Matt. xiii. 13. 



13. The influence of the Teacher (Philosopher, 
Preacher) on the Audience.^ 



' He (Rufus) used to speak 
in such a way that each of us 
as we sat thought that some- 
one had accused us to him ; 
so did he hit {rjirTeTo) upon 
what was done, so did he 
place the faults of each before 
his eyes (ouro) npo d(f>6a\fiS)p 
iriBcL ra iKacTTov kuko) . . . 
Who hearing thee read or 
discourse is troubled {riyoivia- 
arev) about himself or turns 
{iireoTpdcfirj) to himself or goes 
away and says, " The philo- 
sopher hit me well : I must 
no longer do these things " ? ' 
— Bk. 1 1 1 ., ch. xxiii., §§ 29, 37. 



N.T. 
' But if all prophesy, and 
there come in one unbelieving 
or unlearned (t8ia>Tr]s)^ he is 
convicted {eXeyxfrai) by all, 
he is searched {avaKplverai) 
by all, the secrets of his heart 
become manifest (ra Kpvnra 
Tr]s Kapblas avrov (Pavepa 
yiVerai), and SO he will fall 
upon his face and worship 
God, declaring " Indeed God 
is in you.'" — i Cor. xiv. 24, 25 



^ The parallel is drawn by Dr. Moffatt in the Expositor 
March 191 3, p. 285. 



CHAPTER X. 

Differences between Epictetus and the 
New Testament in Language, Thought 
and Teaching. 

Although we have drawn attention to remark- 
able parallels between Epictetus and the New 
Testament, we must point out certain Differences 
between them : — 

I. ayairdcD, dya7Tr]T6<;. 

Certainly in Stob. 9 dyaTrdco is used in a sense 
approaching that of N.T. ' love.' ' As when thou 
seest a viper or asp or scorpion in an ivory or gold 
box thou dost not, on account of the magnificence of 
the material (in which it is enclosed), love it {dya7ra<;) 
and count it happy, but, because its nature is 
harmful, shun it and loathe it (fjuvadTrrj) . . .' But, 
as we have seen under ' Contentment ' in the 
preceding Chapter, p. 124, the Verb is used in the 
Classical sense of *be content' — Bk. IV., ch. iv., 

§45. 

Similarly in N.T. dya7Tr)T6<; means * beloved,' but 
in E. it has the Classical sense of ^satisfactory,' 



E. 

dyanrjTov yap, ft firj8e7roT€ 
dpiivres ravTrjv rfju irpoao^rjv 



N.T. 
ovTos iariv 6 vlos fxov 6 dya- 
TrrjTos. — Matt. iii. 1 7. 



126 



DIFFERENCES IN LANGUAGE, THOUGHT, ETC. 12/ 



E. N.T. 

oXlyciv y( dixaprrjixdroiv €kt6s ' This is my beloved son.' 

iauixcda. — Bk. IV., ch. xii., Also i Cor. iv. 14 and 

§ 19- often. 

' For it is satisfactory if, by | 
never remitting this attention' 
(i.e. the endeavour to be 
faultless) Sve shall be free 
from a few faults at least.' | 

2. X6'yo<^. 

In N.T. this term is used in the sense of * word ' 
— e.g. Matt. vii. 26. ' Everyone who hears these 
words of Mine ' — or * account,' ' reckoning,' e.g. 
Matt. XXV. 19. ' Holds a reckoning with them.' 
In E. however the term, as a rule, means * reason,' 
a meaning which it never has in N.T., e.g. Bk. I., 
ch. iii,, § 3. ' Reason (\6709) and thought {yvcofir}) 
in common with the Gods ' ; Ench. xxxii., § 3, &c. 

3. ol/C€LO<;. 

Once at any rate in E. this term has the meaning 
of iSLo<; ; in N.T. it always means ' belonging to a 
household,' e.g. : — 



E. 

oTT€p ovv arot (pvaiKov kcu 
crvyyeves, 6 \6yos, rovro koi 
oIkcIov r]yr}(rdiJL€vos tovtov iin- 
fieKov. — Stob. II. 

*That therefore which is 
natural and congenial to thee, 
Reason, think to be specially 
thy own and take care of it.' 



N.T. 

TOVS oIk€IOVS Trjs TlllTTCOiS. 

Gal. vi. 10. 

' Those of the household 
of the faith.' 

(Included in, but not equi- 
valent to iSios.) 

et be Tis Ta>v Idicov koI fxdXi- 
(TTa olKciavov Trpovoel. — I Tim. 
v. 8. 

' But if any man provides 
not for his own and especially 
those of his household.' 



128 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

4. ova {ova in N.T.). 

In E. this is a term of praise, but in N.T. a 
term of scorn : — 

E. 

dXX' eTraivecrov fxe. ri Xeyeis 
TO enuivecrov ; eiTre fxoi ova Kai 
dav^acrrios. — Bk. III., ch. 
xxiii., § 24. 

* But praise me. — What 



N.T. 

And those that were pass- 
ing by were speaking evil 
(i^Xaa-cjirjfjLovv) of Him, shak- 
ing their heads and saying, 
ova 6 KaraXvoiu top vaov . . . 



dost thou mean by " praise " ? j o-ao-ov aeavrov. 



— Say to me " Fine " and 
"Marvellous."' 
Also § 32. 



' Ah ! Thou that destroyest 
the Temple . . . save Thy- 
self.' — Mark xv. 29, 30. 



5. ovaia. 

This term is used in three different senses in E., 
none of which is found in N.T. : — 

a. In the sense of 'essence/ e.g. — Bk. II., ch. 
viii., § 2. ' What then is the Essence of God } ' as 
in ofioovdLo^ of the Creeds ; Frag. Diss, i, * It is 
not sufficient to learn the essence of good and 
evil.' 

/3. In the sense of ' subject,' e.g. — Bk. II., ch. xi., 
§ 19. 'What subject has fallen under our enquiry V 

7. In the sense of ' kind of things,' e.g. Bk. I., 
ch. xxii., § II. 'Where then are we to place "the 
good " {to a^aOov) ^ To what kind of things shall 
we adapt (our preconception of) it ? ' 

In N.T. the term occurs twice only, and in the 
sense of 'substance,' 'goods,' Luke xv. 12, 13. 
* Give me the portion of the substance that falleth 
{e-m^aXkov) to me . . . and there wasted {Btea/cup- 
TTiaev) his substance.' 



DIFFERENCES IN LANGUAGE, THOUGHT, ETC. 1 29 



6. irXeove^ia. 

Tills term is always used in N.T. in a bad sense 
meaning ' greediness,' * covetousness,' the character 
of the grasping spirit ; in E., however, it occurs in 
the good sense of ' advantage,' e.g. : — 

N.T. 

olrives aTTTjXyTjKOTes eavTovs 
irapebbiKav rrj daeXyeia €is epya- 
aiav ciKadaparias irdfrTjs kv 
TrXfoi/e^ta.— Eph. iv. 1 9. 

'Who, being past feeling, 
gave themselves up to lascivi- 
ousness, to work all unclean- 
ness with greediness.' 

7. crcoTTjpLa. 

It is known that this N.T. term occurs on pagan 
inscriptions in a religious sense in the Imperial 
Period. E., however, does not use the term in a 
strictly religious sense, but rather in an exclamation 
like the modern ' Bless me.' That his use of the 
term is widely different from that of N.T. may be 
seen from the following comparison : — 



E. 

Spa yap olov ecrriv. . .€vyva>- 
Hocrvvrju KTrjcraaBai, oar) rj nXeo- 
j/c^ia.—Bk. II., ch. X., §9. 

' For see what it is ... to 
secure a good temper, how 
great the advantage.' 



E. 1 

TL aroi edo^a ; Bavtxao-Tcos^ Kv- 
pi€, Tr)v efXTjV oroi cr(OTr)piav . . . 
TovTois ov iroWol dvvavrai vra- 
paKoKovBelv, /xa rfjv vp-sripav 
aoiTripiav. — Bk. III., ch. xxiii., 
§§11,26. 

' What didst thou think of 
me ? — Marvellous, by my 
life, sir. . .By your life, there 
are not many capable of 
pursuing these things.' • 



N.T. 

bvi^apus yap Qeov €(tt\v fls 
acorqplav TravrX tw irLfrrevovri. 
— Rom. i. 16. 

' For it is God's power 
unto salvation for everyone 
who believes.' 



I30 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 



It must be added, however, that acoTrjpla is not 
always in N.T. used in a strictly religious sense, 
but rather in the ordinary sense of ' safety ' ; in this 
sense the term occurs at least once in E., e.g. : — 



I N.T. 

! TrapaKaXS) viias /xeraXajSelj/ 
I Tpo<f>r]s, rovTO yap npos rrjs 
j vp-eTepas arcorrjpias v7rdp)(€L. — 
Acts xxvii. 34. 

' I beseech you to take 
food, for this is for your 
safety.' 
Also (probably) Luke i. 71. 



E. 

aXX* e/ceiJ/ot pev Tr]v piado- 
<f>opiav XapjBdvovTes opvvovaff 
rrdvTcov TrpoTiprja-eiv Trjv tov 
Kaiaapos (Tcorrjpiai/ . . . ; — 
Bk. L, ch. XIV., § 15. 

' But do they (the soldiers) 
when they are receiving their 
pay swear to prefer before all 
things the safety of Caesar...?' 

8. TaireLvo^ and its Cognates. 

A greater contrast in the use of these terms 
cannot be imagined. That which is most praise- 
worthy in N.T. is in E. an object of scorn and con- 
tempt. E. adopts the characteristically Pagan atti- 
tude towards that which is the great Christian virtue, 
Humility, regarding it as Meanness and therefore 
unworthy of man, who calls himself God's son, e.g. : — 

a. Taireivo^. 
E. 

oLvOpoiTTOv raTTeiuov, pepyjrL- 
/xoipov, o^vdvpov, SetXoV, TTavra 
pepcfiupevov, naaiv eyKaXovvra, 
prjbeTTore rj(rv)(Lav ciyovra, nep- 
Tvepov. — Bk. III., ch. ii., § 14. 

*A man mean, discon- 
tented, quick - tempered, 
cowardly, complaining of 
everything, accusing every- 
body, never at rest, a brag- 

t.' 



N.T. 

(Our Lord's words.) 

npavs elpt kcu rarrdvos rfj 
Kapdla. — Matt. xi. 29. 

' I am meek and lowly in 
heart.' 

rarreivols de dldaxxii' xdpiv. — 
James iv. 6. 

' (God. . .) but gives grace 
to (the) lowly.' 



DIFFERENCES IN LANGUAGE, THOUGHT, ETC. 13I 



/8. TaTreivoQ). 

E. 

6 d' 'OSvo-crev? ore vavayos 
e^eppicfiOTj, fir] ri iTarrelvcoarev 
avTOV rj aTropia, fir) ri €7r*Kka- 
a-ev ; — Bk. III., ch. xxvi., 

§33. 

'But when Odysseus was 
cast away by shipwreck, did 
his destitution deject him ? 
did it break his spirit ? ' 

7. Ta7retvo(f)po(Tvv7]. 
E. 

TTOV €TL KOkaKciaS TOTTOS, TTOV 

raTr€ivo(l)poavvrjs ; — Bk. III., 
ch. xxiv., § 56. 

' Where is there still room 
for flattery, for meanness ?' 

9. The Supreme Power. 

Like the Stoics E. confounds God with the 
World ; the contrast between this and the state- 
ments in N.T. respecting God and the World is 
evident from the following comparison : — 

N.T. 

6 Geoy 6 rroirjcras rbv Koafiov 



N.T. 

ooTis ovu TaneLvaxTfi eavrov 
cos TO Tvaihlov rovTO^ ovtos icrriv 
6 fiei^cov iv rfj ^aa-iXfta rcov 
ovpavSiv. — Matt, xviii. 4. 

' Whosoever therefore shall 
humble himself as this little 
child, he is the greatest in 
the Kingdom of Heaven.' 



N.T. 

8ouXeu6)j/ rw Kvpiat ficra ird- 
crrjs Tan€ipo(f)po(Tvvrjs. — Acts 
XX. 19. 

' Serving the Lord with all 
humility.' 



Travra vnaKovet ra Koa-fito Kai 
VTiripfTil . . . ajxeivov vrrep rjfxcov 
^e^ovXevrat pera tcov oXav koX 
rjpas (tvv8ioi.k5)v. — Frag. Diss. 

3- 

' All things obey and serve 
the World... (It) has con- 
sulted the best for us, govern- 
ing us in conjunction with 
the whole.' * 



Koi Travra ra ev avT(o. — Acts 
xvii. 24. 

* God who made the World 
and all things that are in it.' 



V 



K 2 



CHAPTER XL 

how to account for the resemblances.— 
Had Epictetus Relations with Chris- 
tianity ? 

I. In view of the remarkable parallels existing 
between Epictetus and the New Testament such as 
those to which attention has been drawn in the first 
nine Chapters of this book, the question has been 
asked, ' Was Epictetus a Christian ? ' We must 
now give reasons why we cannot answer * Yes.' 

a. In the first place, Epictetus makes many 
references to Zeus and the Gods. Granted that 
the Zeus of Epictetus is a far nobler Being than 
the Zeus of Homer, yet we cannot understand how 
a Christian could speak of Man as son of Zeus 
(Bk. I., ch. iii., § 3). And, as to the Gods, certainly 
a Christian does not endorse Polytheism (* Piety 
towards the Gods.' — Ench. xxxi., § i). 

13. In the second place, Epictetus speaks of the 
Christians apparently as ' the Galileans.' Speaking 
of meeting death fearlessly, Epictetus asks : eha 
VTTO jjt^avla^ fjikv Bvvarai ti<; ovtco hiaTedrjvai irpo^ 
Tama /cat viro eOov^ ol VaXCkaloi ; ' Can then any- 
one be thus disposed to these things from madness 
and the Galileans from habit } ' — Bk. IV., ch. vii., § 6. 
If Epictetus is really referring to the Christians who 
132 



HOW TO ACCOUNT FOR THE RESEMBLANCES. 1 33 

would die rather than sacrifice to heathen deities, 
we can perceive the scorn underlying the passage. 
' It helps to confirm this opinion that M. Antoninus 
(ii., § 3) mentions them by their proper name of 
Christians, as suffering death out of mere obstinacy ' 
(Rouse, p. 341). And certainly the apostate Em- 
peror Julian centuries later spoke of the Christians 
under the same name. 

7. In the third place, as has been noticed in the 
preceding Chapter, raireivof; and its cognates are 
used by Epictetus, not in a Christian but in a 
Pagan sense. Christianity says, * Humble thyself,' 
Paganism, * Assert thyself.' This of itself would 
be sufficient to show that Epictetus was not a 
Christian. 

3. In the fourth place, Pantheism is taught 
directly in Frag. Diss. 3 (§ 9, ch. x.), and suggested 
sometimes, e.g. Bk. II., ch. viii., §§ 12, 13. — ovk 
olBa<; OTL Oeov T/oe^et?. . .eV aavT(p <j)ip6c<; avrov* . . 
'Dost thou not know that thou art feeding a 
God . . . .? It is in thyself that thou dost carry 
Him.' This, of course, is not the teaching of 
Christianity, but of Stoicism. 

e. In the fifth and last place, lofty as is the 
moral teaching of Epictetus, the examination of it 
convinces us that its tone is lower than that of the 
teaching contained in the New Testament. To 
give but one illustration, when, after considering 
what is covered by the term afiapTdvai in Epictetus, 
we turn and examine St. Paul's or St. John's use of 
the term, we are conscious that we have risen to a 
higher platform. *Sin,' as described in the New 



134 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

Testament, can hardly be said to be met with in 
Epictetus : afjuaprdvo) in Epictetus means ' I commit 
a fault/ e.g. eV ijiavTov €7n(7Tpe(j)co, el ravra Kayo) 
dfiaprdvco. — Bk. IV., ch. iv., § 7. * I turn to myself 
(to learn) if I also commit the same faults.' 

We conclude, then, that Epictetus was not a 
Christian. 

2. A very natural question to ask is, 'Was Epictetus 
acquainted with the New Testament writings ? ' 
\ To this we cannot give a definite answer. We 

\ know that Epictetus was born about A.D. 60, when 
the New Testament was in process of formation, 
and that in his early life he removed to Rome, 
where there was already in existence a branch of 
the Christian Church. In Rome he remained until 
he was expelled by Domitian in A.D. 94. Accord- 
ingly he may have seen some of the New Testa- 
ment writings — written as they were in the Greek 
tongue — or, at any rate, he may have come into 
touch with Christian teaching and thought. But, 
after all, there are two points to be considered. 

a. In the first place, assuming that Epictetus 
was acquainted with Christian writings and thought, 
this acquaintance must have been somewhat super- 
^ficial, if we examine his description of a Jew : orav 
3' dvakdPr) TO Trddo^ to tov /BejSafifJbevov koI rjprjfii- 
vov, Tore koX eaTi tco ovtl koI KoXelrai 'louSato?. — 
Bk. II., ch. ix., § 20. If, as seems natural, /Se^a/Ji- 
fievov refers to Baptism and fjprjfievov refers to 
Circumcision, and we therefore translate the passage, 
* But when he has adopted the sentiments of the 



HOW TO ACCOUNT FOR THE RESEMBLANCES. 1 35 

baptised and circumcised man, then he both really 
is, and is called, a Jew,' we notice that Epictetus 
has fallen into the common Pagan error of the 
time, of confusing Jews and Christians and regard- 
ing Christians merely as a Jewish sect. Also we 
ask, ' Why did not Epictetus, if he was really 
acquainted with New Testament writings and 
thought, use the technical terms for ' baptise ' and 
' circumcise,' i.e. fiaTTTi^o) and TreptrefjLvco ^ 

^. In the second place, when we consider the 
remarkable parallelism in Phrases that exists 
between Epictetus and the New Testament, we 
question whether there is really any need to assume 
that Epictetus quoted from the New Testament. 
For instance, it seems fair to urge that any teacher, 
speaking with authority, might say aXV iy(a 
aoi Xeyo). — Bk. III., ch. vii., § 13 (iyco Be Xeyco 
v/uv — Matt. V. 22) or ^iJTCt koI evpr}aeL<; — Bk. I., 
ch. xxviii., § 19 {^yrelTe Kai evprjaere — Matt. vii. 7). 
Again, it seems reasonable to suppose that such a 
phrase as i'7TL<yvcoai<; t?}? aXydela^ (Bk. II., ch. xx., 
§ 21, Heb. X. 26) was already in existence before it 
was used by Epictetus and the author of the 
Epistle to the Hebrews, and that they took it from 
a common source. 

We conclude then that, after all, it is doubtful 
whether Epictetus was acquainted with the New 
Testament. 

3. How then are we to account for the Resem- 
blances between Epictetus and the New Testa- 
ment ? • 



136 EPICTETUS AND THE NEW TESTAMENT. 

a. Whenever we find that the Thought and 
Teaching of Epictetus can, for loftiness of tone, be 
paralleled with much that is found in the New 
Testament, surely this is evidence that ' the Light 
which lighteth every man ' shone clearly into his 
heart and mind. Such has been and still is the 
case with many teachers outside the pale of 
Christianity. And in old times, outside the pale of 
Judaism, before the coming of Christianity, nay, 
preparing the way for Christianity, there were 
inspired men sent from God, in whom this Light 
shone: witness Heracleitus of Ephesus with his 
doctrine of the Divine Logos, witness Zoroaster, 
witness Socrates, Plato and many others. Such, 
we conclude, was Epictetus, and in this way do we 
explain the loftiness of his thought. 

^. When we attempt to explain why Epictetus 
in his language approximates to that of the New 
Testament, we are compelled to raise the question, 
' Is it likely that he would use terms unfamiliar to 
him?' 

The answer can only be an unqualified ' No.' 
And we know that, as experts like Drs. Deissmann, 
Milligan and Moulton have made abundantly 
clear, the language of the New Testament was the 
language spoken by the people of the time, the 
language of documents that were either non-literary 
or else literary to a very limited extent. Such 
surely is the language of Epictetus. And as 
evidence, that so far from adopting that of 
classical writers, Epictetus could use language that 
was non-literary, we may refer to Ench. xi. : to 



HOW TO ACCOUNT FOR THE RESEMBLANCES. 1 37 

%ft)/otoj' a^rjpWrjVy 'the estate has been taken 
away/ where we notice that to the literary form 
a^rjpeOrj '-v'^ has been suffixed, a usage which can 
be paralleled from the Papyri. 

Our conclusion then is that the language of 
Epictetus resembles that of the New Testament 
because it was the language as spoken by the 
people of the time. 

^ Dr. Moulton points out that the adding of a superfluous 
-V is easily attributed to scribes : as a better example of non- 
literary language we suggest the use oi aveo-rdKaaiv in Bk. I., 
ch. iv., § 33 : TpinToXefKO . . . ^afiovs iravres avOpmnot dpfa-rd- 
Kaa-iv. 'To Triptolemos all men have raised altars.' The 
literary form is dpca-TrjKaa-tv and is moreover intransitive in 
meaning. 



( 139 ) 



INDEX TO GREEK WORDS. 





PAGE 






PAGE 


ayaTrdu) . 


. 124, 126 


dir* &pTi . 


. 


. 93 


ayanrjTos 


. 126 


aireXdijiV air-fiy^aTO 


. 3 


ayyapda, euoj 


• 15 


direpiffiraffTos, - 


(as 


49, 50 


aypvirvcw 


. . 63 


dir4x(>} 




64,6s 


&ya> 


. 64, 89 


diroSrj/xeco 




• 3 


ayd)V 


. 70 


airo5oKifid((o 




. 65 


a5e\(})6s . 


16, 22 


T. OTToAAv^eVoty 




. 112 


&5lK0S 


. 114 


diroWvco . 




. 83 


a56Kl/MOS . 


• 48, 57 


dir6a"iraa'iJ.a 




• "7 


45u 


. 112 


airh rSre 




82,83 


ae\4co 


2 


dpeaKO) 




• "5 


aidios 


. 48, 49 


apxireKTuv 




. 19 


alpiffis . 


. 16 


ai/rdpKTjs . 




. 124 


aicr-x^poKoyia 


17, 121, 122 


avrSx^ip . 




• SO 


alciu 


• 17 


&(!>€$ 




7, 15 


aldvLos . 


48, 49 


a.<pripiQ7]V 




• 137 


aKO-fi 


. 17, 18 


d(popd(D . 




• 5 


aKovaa 


. 13 








aKovcrcCf Ofxai 


. 84, 85 


fidWw . 




. 65 


aWaxov . 


. . 89 


jSoTTTt'CcW . 


65, 


66, 13s 


hfiaprduto, 113,114, 


118,133,134 


fiapeofiai . 




• "7 


afidpTrjiJLa 


. 127 


fiaaiXiffffa 




. 20 


a/xapria . * 


. 113, 114 


fiaardCco . 




66,67 


&u . 


. 99, 100 


T. fie^a/jifiiuov K 


• T^pW^VO 


. . 134 


dva<Trpo(p'f) 


i8, 19 


fiidCofiai . 




67,68 


due^iKaKla, os 


. 19 


iSAeVo . 




. 68 


aueardKaffiv 


. 137 


fioTjdSs . 




. Ill 


dv6T]T05, &(ppUV 


. 53 


Poi\Ofj.ai . 




68,69 


dyrl 


. 90 








dvTiiroico/xai 


. 105, 115 


FaAiXaioi 




. 132 


&pud€v . 


.•88 


yivvdu), . 




69,70 



I40 



INDEX TO GREEK WORDS. 





PAGE 




PAGE 


ylvofiai . 


. . 85 


i-iriirXiicrcra) 


72, 73 


yLvdxTKQ} . 


. . 85 


iiriffKotrew 


. 73 


yvw/xri 


. 69, 127 


iiri(rrp4(f>w, 51, 7^ 


„ no, 125,134 


yvixvd((o . 


. 70 


eiri<pdv€ia 


• 9 


yvvaiKCLpiov 


. 20 


fpyov 


. 112 


yuylq,, iroieiv (irpdcrffeiv) eV . 5 


epXafiai els (Reflex.) . . 6 






^aradev . 


. 109 


SeiKuvu . 


. 82 


evdaifiwv . 


. 52 


SeiaiSaifxoveffTepovs 


. 61 


€v<r4fi€ia, 7JS 


21, 55» 109 


54oy 


. lOI 


eifxapicrreio 


. 74, III 


SecTjuci, 5e&j 


. 117 






SiaKovea . 


70, 71 


C-i]Tet K. evprjffeis 


• 4, 135 


SlUKOVOS . 


. 71 






81CI, TravTSs 


. 118 


V . 


. . 84 


8ia(pepcD . 


. 29, n7 


^dopi, . 


. 108, 109 


SioiKTicris . 


• 25 


iJHW, ^s . 


. . 83 


SoKew 


. 123 






80KOVV 


. 101 


d€7os 


50, 51 


8okS) fioi (e/iauT^) 


• 7 


06 Aw . I, 


56, 68, 69, 88 


S6^a . . 9, 


10, 21, 122 


exifia, e\i^Ls . 


• 74 


hovKayuyica 


. 71 


dvrjTds 


• 53 


SouAeia . 


114, 123 


dpiafifievco 


74, 75 


SouAeucu . 


113, 131 


Opi^f KSfirj 


. 120 


8ov\os 


3. 71, 114 










XSios 


. 127 


kavrSv 


36, 37, 68 


ISldoTTjS 


. 125 


iyd) . A.€7ft) 


2, 135 


I80V 


. 100 


e'lKdiu 


. 34 


lepevs 


30, 64 


e^prjKa 


86,87 


'{pa 


15, 95, 96, 97 


els . . . • 


• 91 


'Ipari; . 


. 8 


4k€7 


. 89 


'lovda7os . 


• 134 


iKe7po5 


38,39 


t(rfJL€p 


. . 83 


i\€v9epiay OS 


. 114 






ilxTeptrepevofiai . 


71, 72 


KaOalpw, KaQapl^oi 


. 114 


6yu.TrAe/ca> . 


• 72 


KaK6s . 55, 


113, 124, 125 


€V . 


. 91 


Kav(i>p 


. 21 


i^ovalav diSufii 


• 3 


KaTaKvirro) 


• 75 


inlyvwais r. aATjdeias . 


9, 135 


KaTa<pi\4a> 


. 104 


iiriOvficw . 


• "5 


Kep65o^os 


• 51 


itrtKoKiOfiOA 


4. Ill 


K€(pd\aiov 


. 123 



INDEX TO GREEK WORDS. 



141 



Kifeci} 


PAGE 

75»76 


va6s 


PAGE 

• 24 


KhTJffis (fcaAe7v) 


• 4 


peKpSs . . 53, 54, III 


KOiviapia. . 


. Ill 


vfjirios 


31,59 


Koivwv6s . 


. 22 


VOfllflWS . 


2 


kSkkivos . 


• 51 






KoKaQu, KSXaa-is 


. 113 


|uAoi/ 


. 27 


KoXKvpiov 


. 22 






IcdflT] 


. 120 


oidUfJLCV . 


83,84 


KOfxxl/cos ex^ii^ 


.7.8 


olSos 


• 133 


Koa-fieco, OS 


. 120 


oIkcTos 


. 127 


k6(Tijlios . 


• 52 


olKo^e(Tir6Tt]s 


• 25 


K6(TflOS 


. 46 


oiKovofjiia . 


• 25 


Kpd$^aT0Sy KpdfiaTTos 


22, 23 


oIkos 


46,47 


KTTJJ/OS 


• 23 


olKOVfieVT], 7) 


. 8 


Kj5pi€, iXi-qffov . 


4 


otos (Inter.) 


41,42 


K^piOS 


3, 131 


6\6k\t}pos 


. 54 


Kvvdpiou . 


• 23 


'6irov 


. 89 


AoAew 


76, 121 


Spare k. irpoffex^Te 

'6pK0S 


• 4 
. 121 


AoAto 


. 24 


r 

'65 (Demons.) . 


• 39 


A67c«> 
Ae/TTw 


76, 121 

76,77 


ts (Inter.) 

^(TlOS 


41,42 

54, 55 


\eirovpY^(i) 


. 77 


ova 


. 128 


\oyiK6s . 


. 120 


ovai 


. II 


\6yos . 64, 92, 10 


7, 125, 127 


ovdtis 


. . 38 


fxaKdpios . 


. 52 


ovaia 


. 128 


fjLa\aK6s . 


. 124 


OVTOS 


. 45 


fidxaipa . 


. 24 


ovrG) K. vjxits voie^re 


2 


IxeipaKiov . 


• 59 






fi4(Tos (Prep.) . 


. 94 


iraidv 


. 124 


fieravo€(t} 


. 124 


vaidaywySs 


. 26 


/xeriupos, iCofiai 


• 53 


rtaiSlov . . 2 


0, 103, 104 


fifXP'- ^^^ 


. 93 


rrapd 


41, 91, 92 


fi4xpt 5Se 


. 93 


irapaKovco 


. 77. 78 


M . . . 


I, 6, 98, 99 


TrapaKirtrroo 


• 75 


fiij yeyoiro 


6, 112 


iras . ov (or fii]) 


13, 14 


flilTi 


• 99 


TTivpdKei. . 


. 86 


fiop<t>-fi 


. 31, 32, 33 


irepiTefxva} 


. 135 


/x6p(pwcris 


32, 33 


irepirepfiofMi 


71, 72 


fxapSs 


. n 


irepvepos . 


. 71, 130 



142 



INDEX TO GREEK WORDS. 





PAGE 






PAGE 


vr)X6s, ir^Xivos . 


. 117 


ff(t>(ppov4(ii}^ ffuxppocrvvri 


. 122 


TTTjpa, ITIjplSlOV . 


26, 27, 103 


aar-qpia . 


. 


129, 130 


irXeove^ia 


. 129 


TaXaiiroipos 


, 


• 59 


TrKi)v 


. 97, 98 


raireivSs . 


. 114, 


130, 133 


irXova-LOSy TrXovros, 


4a> . 122 

. 27, 28 


raireivo(f)po(ri>v'r] 


Tuntivd 


w . 131 


TTi/evfia 


T4Xei05 


. 


. 59 


irolrjfia . 


. I, 5, 78 


reXdovrjs . 


. 


. 33 


. 119 


ttjXlkovtos 


. 


. 44 


TTOPTjpds . 


. 55, 57 


tI . . . Kui (two 


Datives) 


; II, 12 


irpoKOir-f) . 


. 89 
. 28, 29 


Tt/iTj, irpoTi/xdw 
ris; (Rel.) 


• 


. 116 
. 40 


TTpOVoid) . 


. 108, 127 


rotovTOs . 


, 


. 45 


TTpos 


. 92 


TOaOVTOS . 


^ 


45, 46 


TTpSs (x4yco) 
irpSs oXiyov 


. 6 
. 8 


Tvx6v 


• 


. lOI 

. 84 


TTpocrdyo} . 


. . 64 








Trpoffex^ . 


• 79 


vfivew, li/xvos 


. 


. 112 


irp6(T(t}irov 


29, 30 


inrdyco 


. 


. 64 


TTpOTlfMaU . 


. n6 


vndpx^ • 


. 


80,81 


irpO(})'fjTT)S 


. 30 


vxep 




. 93 


TTpUTOS 


61, 62 


virrjperew 


70, 


71, 131 


irT&x^s . 


. . 56 


(pdymre . 


. 


82, no 


^a$5os . 


. 27 


(pavXos 


55, 


62, 114 


aawpSs . . 5 


6, 57, 58, 121 


(j>iXos 6eov 
(piXScrropyos 




. Ill 
. 60 


<TaTrpS>s . 
(rapKiSia, crcofxa . 
a-f}fj.€pov (^/xe'pa), 7} 


. 58 

• 59 

• 9 


cpSPos daudrov 
(pvXaiiii . 
(pixris 7] d*'0poo7rf 


I'VyV 


. 123 
. 124 
. 10 


CTKvdpCOTTd^b) 


. 122 








(TTavp6s . 


15, 79 


XapaKT-fjp 


. 


33,34 


(xravpoui . 


. 79 


Xdpis T. 0e^ 


. 


. 10 


areuoxcopia, 4c 


.74 


XopTdCw . 


. 


81, 82 


(TTiX^ia . 


• 79, 80 


Xovs, X'^'f'^s 


. 


. 117 


crriXirvos 


. 80 


Xpeiav ^XQ> 


. 


. 3 


aroix^la . 
avvKTrdvC) 


• 30, 31 
. 82 


^vx-h . I 


3, 28, 3^ 


U 35, 63 


(Tvuoida, (TvyeiSws, 


TvveiSrjais, 


556 


, 


89,90 




118, 119 


is . 




. 61 


(ripfo 


. 80 


&(rTe 


44, 


[05, 106 


cx^/ia . 


• 31, 32, 33 


&(j>€Xov (o(j>eXov] 


1 


.5,6 



( 143 ) 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Bk. I., ch. i., § 3 . 
„ §11 . 
» §13 . 
„ §i6 . 

„ §20 . 
„ §111. 

ch. ii., § 3 . 
ch. iii., § I 

,, §2 . 

» § 3 54, 

» §5 . 

» §9 . 

ch. iv., § 4 . 

„ §30 . 

ch. Yi., § 6 . 

» § 13 . 

„ ch. vii., § 2 . 

„ §30 . 

ch. ix., §§ 6, 13 

„ §§ II, 12 

„ §19 . 

„ §20 . 

ch. xi., § 32 . 

„ „ §38 . 

„ ch. xii., § I . 

„ „ §15 . 
„ ch. xiv., §§ 13, 14 

„ § 15 . 

ch. xix., § 18 . 



Epictetus. 




PAGE 


PAGE 


39,70 


Bk.I.,ch.xix.,§22 . . 86 


. 117 


„ „ §24 . 


. 47 


. 6 


„ ch. XX., § 19 . 


• 45 


12, 75 


,, ch. xxii., § 10 . ] 


6,22 


. 99 


„ §11 . 


. 128 


. 23 


„ §15 . 


II 


• 3 


„ „ §16 . 


. 24 


. 116 


„ch.xxiv.,§5 . 


45 


67, 116 


„ §14 . 


23 


116, 132 


„ch.xxv.,§§26, 28 


• 74 


. 59 


„ch.xxvi.,§3 . 


70 


• 4 


„ §9 . 


102 


. 29 


„ „ §16 . 


98 


. 137 


,, ch. xxvii., § 9 . 


89 


. 48 


„ §13 . 


II 


• 3 


„ §21 . 


90 


. 18 


„ ch.xxviii., § 9 . 


4 


. 63 


„ § 19 10,11; 


^I35 


. 116 


„ §§ 28, 30 


22 


. 117 


„ch.xxix.,§ 11 . 


3 


82, no 


„ „ §16 . 


96 


. 86 


„ §§ 22, 23 


80 


. 91 


„ §31 • 


8 


9, 73 


,, „ §35 . ^7 


,105 


• 99 


„ „ §36 . . 


5 


. 85 


„ §41 . 


102 


. 109 


„ §49 . 


4 


. 139 


„ „ §55 . 


5 


. 100 


„ch. xxx.,§i . 


115 



144 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Bk. II., ch. i., § 23 

» » § 34 

„ §36 

.,§20 

§3 

§4 

§9 

§13 

§7 



ch. ii. 
ch. iv., 

>j 
ch. v., 

j» 
ch. vi., 



ch. 



§12 
§17 
§23 
§26 
.,§8 
,, §9 
» § 12 
», § 13 
,, ch. viii., § 2 

» §11 

„ §§ 12, 

» §§ 13= 

» §§i8, 

,y §24 
§20 

•,§9 
§§i8, 
§13 
§19 
§20 

§15 
§17 
§21 

i.,§6 
§16 
§17 

^,§II 
§19 
§9 
§§iS= 



ch. ix. 
ch. X. 

ch. xi. 



ch, xii. 



„ ch. 

,, ch. xiv. 

»> >> 
„ ch. XV. 





rAQE 




114 




72 




123 




79 




36 


• 44, 57, 83 1 




98 




17 




97 


105, 


115 




96 




103 




102 




124 




96 




74 




4 




no 


107, 


128 




117 


13 . 


133 


14 . 


109 


19,21. 


119 




43 




134 




129 


19 . 


"3 




41 




128 




98 




86 




5 




7 




46 




90 




85 




108 




77 




57 


16 . 


41 



Bk. II., ch. xvi., § 22 

,> J, § 28 . 

„ §42 . 

>> >» § 44 • 
»» », §§ 45, 46 

„ ch.xvii.,§i3 . 

„ §22 . 

„ §27 . 

»» ,, § 29 . 

>» J, § 34 . 

» §39 . 

ch. xviii., § 3 . 

» §4 . 

„ §8 . 

„ §14 . 

„ §15 . 

„ §18 . 

„ § 24 . 

„ §28 . 

„ §29 . 

ch. xix., § 16 . 

„ §19 . 

„ §20 . 

„ §25 . 

» §27 . 

„ >, § 29 . 

,, ch. XX., § lo . 

„ §11 . 

„ §18 . 

„ §21 . 

» § 22 

21, 51 

„ §27 . 

„ §29 . 

„ §30 • 

» §32 . 

„ „ § 33 • 

,, ch. xxi., § I . 

M §2 53, 

„ § II . 



PAGE 

75 
115 
no 

47 
114 

83 
no 

88 
III 

2 
64 
60 
78 
87 
8 
6 
20 

7 

70 

III 

II 

12 

16, 36 

93 
III 

5 

65 
12 
10, 76 
9, 135 



55,73 
30 

83 

90 

84 

91 

6,53 

60, 102 

. 103 



54 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



145 



72 



Bk. II., ch. xxi., § 12 
jj j» § 14 
„ „ § 20 

,, ch. xxii., § 10 
„ § 26 
,. >, § 31 

„ch.xxiii.,§3 

» „ § 5 
5» >» § 7 
„ §11 
». »♦ § 39 
„ch.xxvi.,§4 

Bk. III.,ch.i., §15 
» „ § 18 
>> ,j §26 
„ ch. ii., § 3 
»> >» § 8 

,y § 14 

„ ch. iii., § 22 
,, ch. iv., § I 
M » §5 

„ §9 

,, § 10 
„ ch. vi., § 4 

» » §9 

„ ch. vii., § I 

>. >» § 4 

„ § 13 
n ,> § 24 

„ § 30 
„ ch. viii., § 5 
„ ch. ix., §§2,4,9, 13 
,, „ § 15 

» § 16 
„ ch. X., § 8 

„ §13 
„ ch. xi., § 4 
„ ch. XV., § 9 

„ § 12 



124 



PAGE 

47 
58 
22 

94 
26 

23 

27 
74 
I, 93 
71 
61 
I 



120 
65 
77 

130 

28 

43 
21 
96 

97 
18 

125 
46 
62 

135 
61 
96 

87 
55 
23 
56 
2 
7 
56 

33»^4 



Bk. III., ch. 


xvi., § 1 


. 24 




>» 


§7 . 5 


;8, 59 




ch. xviii., § 5 . 9] 


. 113 




)> 


§8 . 


. 12 




>j 


§31 . 


. u8 




ch. xix 


,§i . 


II 




ch. XX 


,§i8 . 


. 93 




ch. xxi 


,§6 . 


. 64 




»j 


§21 . 


. 22 




ch. xxii 


,§4 . 


• 25 




»j 


§5 • 


46 




>> 


§ 10 . 2 


7,57 




j» 


§14 . 


87 




>» 


§22 . 


82 




j> . 


§29 . 


9 




j» 


§32 . 


II 




>> 


§36 . 


13 




»> 


§50 . 27 


, 103 




>» 


§55 . 


64 




>> 


§6i . 


58 




>) 


§66 . 


82 




>> 


§ 69 . 29, c 


;o,72 




>» 


§71 • 


91 




>» 


§72 . 


73 




>> 


§74 • 


23 




»» 


§94 . 


118 




>> 


§99 . I 


2,20 




,, 


§105. 


90 




>» 


§ 106. 


64 




ch. xxiii., § 7 . 


44 




j> 


§ 10 . 


60 




»> 


§11 . 


129 




>j 


§15 . ■ 


119 




>> 


§17 . . 


40 




>> 


§22 . . 


89 




5» 


§24 • 


128 




>> 


§26 . 


129 




>> 


§29 . 


125 




yy 


§32 . . 


128 




»» 


§37 . • 


125 



140 




INDEX TO REFERENCES. 










PAGE 


1 


PAGB 


Bk. IIT 


.,ch 


xxiv., § 2 


. 92 


Bk. IV., ch. i., § 95 


• 38 


,» 


»> 


§17 . 


. 65 


» §99 . 


. 1 10 


>» 


>> 


§20 . 


• 41 


„ §100. 


• 117 


J, 


»j 


§32 . 


• 63 


,. §117- 


. 19 


>» 


j» 


§42 . 


• 113 


» § 151 • 


. 54 


jj 


j> 


§43 . 


• 51 


,y §176. 


. 63 


>> 


>> 


§50 . 


. 120 


„ ch. iii., § I . 


• 39 


>> 


>» 


§56 . 


. 131 


» §2 . 


. 17 


>> 


j> 


§58 . 


. 60 


» §11 . 


• 37 


»> 


»j 


§75 . 


45,53 


„ ch. iv., § 7 . ic 


5, 134 


j> 


j> 


§76 . 


. 71 


„ §25 . 


• 57 


»> 


>> 


§85 . 


• 75 


„ §26 . 


. 76 


j> 


j> 


§92 . 


• 25 


,y §42 . 


. 21 


>j 


j> 


§98 . 


• 45 


y, §45 • 12^ 


\y 126 


j> 


,, 


§99 • 


• 25 


>» >> § 48 . 


. 108 


»> 


>> 


§101 . 


• 89 


„ ch. v., § 8 . 


• 55 


>> 


j> 


§113. 


. 108 


» §9 • 


. 10 


„ch 


XXV] 


.,§3 . 


. 6 


,» yy § 17 • 34, < 


t8,57 


»> 


,, 


§8 . 


. 56 


yy § 19, 20 


32 


>> 


J> 


§§ 18, 19 


. 82 


„ yy §24 . 


45 


>> 


>» 


§25 . 


• 54 


„ ch. vi., § 2 . 


8i 


j> 


9> 


§28 . 


. 108 


>, >j § 4 • 4 


1,80 


>> 


5> 


§30 . loi, 112 


„ ch. vii., § 14 . 


89 


>» 


»> 


§33 . 


• 131 


,y §17 . 


71 


>> 


), 


§38 . 


. 123 


» » §20 . 67 
» „ §21 . 


, no 
67 


Bk. IV., 


ch.i 


.,§§1,2 


[i3» 114 


„ ch. viii.,§ 12 . 


31 


»> 


>) 


§3 • 


55. 114 


„ „ §21 . 


95 


>> 


», 


§§ 26, 28 


. 42 


M §34 . 


86 


jj 


,, 


§43 . 


. 56 


» » §35 . 


100 


)> 


>» 


§48 . 


. 40 


„ ch. ix., § I . 


100 


j> 


»» 


§51 . 


• 4 


„ §4 . 


8 


jj 


i> 


§57 . 


. 68 


», ,» § 6 . 


81 


j» 


)> 


§58 . 


• 3 


» ,, §7 . 5 


2,80 


>» 


>> 


§79 . 


. 15 


„ „ §8 . 


76 


>> 


)> 


§§ 82, 83 


• 93 


„ „ §9 • 


83 


>» 


>> 


§86 . 


. 20 


„ §12 . 


50 


J, 


>j 


§88 . 


. 24 


„ §13 . 


92 


j> 


)> 


§§ 89, 90 


68,110 


„ ch. X., § 12 . 


123 


»> 


>» 


§91 . 


. 43 


„ §20 . 


104 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 




147 




PAGE 








PAGE 


Bk. IV., ch. X., § 29 


. 65, 92 


Enct 


I. xxix.. 


§7 


• 33 


„ ch. xi., § 5 


. 61 


»» 


xxxi., 


§1 




„ » § 17 


• 95 




21, 


34, 109, no, 132 


» § 19 


. 80 


,, 


xxxii.. 


%2 


. 38, 78 


» §31 


. . 58 


,, 


„ 


§3 


. 127 


M § 34 


• 51 


>» 


„ §16 


. 121, 122 


» » § 35 


. 100 


J, 


xxxiii.. 


§§2,, 


3,5 • 121 


„ ch. xii., § I 


. 8 


,, 


,, 


§6 


. 116 


„ §11 


. 40 


,, 


,, 


%1 


. 122 


„ § 19 


126, 127 


,, 


» §§ 13, 


14 . 37 


„ ch. xiii., § 5 


• 32 


,, 


„ §16 


17, 73 


» ,, § 18 


. 16 


,, 


XXXV. 




78, 120 


» § 23 


. 104 


,, 


xxxviii 


, 


• 79 






,, 


xl. 




. 52 


Frag. Diss, i 


. 128 


,, 


xlvi., § I 


. 102 


3 A 


\6, 131, 133 


,» 


xlviii., § I 


• 34 


8 


• 31 


», 


xlix. 




. 37 


23 


77,82 


,, 


li., § I 


• 59 


34 


• 49 














Stob. 


3 




. 124 


Ench. i., § 3 


84, 105 


J, 


10 




. 122 


>, „ §4 


. lOI 


,, 


II 




81, 127 


„ X. 


• 19 


,, 


12 




. 70 


„ xi. 


. 137 


,, 


20 




. 118 


,, xvi. 


. 79 


,, 


23 




• 34 


„ xvii. . 


30,97 


,, 


24 




. 81 


„ xxiii. . 


. IIS 


J, 


47 




. 66 


„ xxiv., § I . 


. 84 










„ XXV., § I . 


. 116 


Cod. 


Vat. 3 




. 109 



L 2 



148 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



New Testament. 



Matt. 





PAGE 






PAGE 


ii. I 


70 


Matt. 


xii. 45 


85 


iii. 17 


126 




xiii. 13 


125 


iv. 3 . . 


96 




xiii. 27 


25 


V. 3, 4 . 


52 




xiii. 46 


87 


V. 15 


43 




xiii. 48 


57 


V. 22, 28 . 2 


, 135 




xiv. 20 


8i 


V. 41 


15 




xiv. 21 


103 


V. 44, 45 . 


119 




xiv. 24 


94 


V. 46 . . 


33 




XV. 26 


23 


vi. 2, 5 . 


65 




XV. 33 


82 


vi. 10 


46 




xvi. 6 


4 


vi. II 


122 




xvi. 21 


82 


vi, 14 


116 




xvii. 4 


. 90 


vi. 16 


122 




xvii. 14 


43 


vi. 25 


no 




xvii. 15 


. 4 


vi, 26 


117 




xvii. 20 


. 89 


vii. 4 


7 




xvii. 27 


. 90 


vii. 7 . 4 


, 135 




xviii. 3 


. 73 


vii. 12 


2 




xviii. 4 


• 131 


vii. 17, 18 . 


. 57 




xviii. 17 


• 78 


vii. 26 


. 127 




xviii. 19 


. 92 


viii. 4 


. 64 




xviii. 25 


• 98 


viii. 10 


. 46 




xix. 23 


. 122 


viii. 29 


. II 




XX. 28 


. 90 


viii. 30 


. 90 




XX. 30, 31 . 


. 4 


ix. 4 


. 8 




xxi. 3 


• 3 


ix. 8 


• 45 




xxi. 23 


• 3 


ix. 14 


. 102 




xxii. 10 


. 56 


X. I 


. 44 




xxii. 16 


. 29 


x. 9, 10 . 


. 27 




xxii. 20 


• 34 


X. 29, 30 . 


. 108 




xxii. 23 


• 99 


xi. 12 


. 68 




xxii. 31, 32 . 


. 118 


xi. 22 


. 98 




xxiii. I 


. 76 


xi. 23 


• 9 




xxiii. 28 


. 120 


xi. 29 


. 130 




xxiv. 20 


■ 96 


xii. 33 


• 57 




xxiv. 36 


. 108 


xii. 42 


. 20 




xxiv. 43 


• 39 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



149 



Matt. 



Mark 





PAGE 




PAGE 


xxiv. 48 


. 56 


Mark xi. 2 


. 64 


XXV. 2 


• 53 


,, xii. 16 


. 34 


XXV. 14 


• 3 


„ xii. 43 


. 56 


XXV. 15 


3»39 


xiii. 9 


. 68 


XXV. 18 


. 87 


,, xiii. 20 


• 13 


XXV. 19 


3, 127 


xiv. 13 


. 67 


XXV. 20, 24 


. 87 


„ xiv. 36 


. 40 


XXV. 44 


. 71 


„ xiv. 49 


• 83 


XXV. 46 


• "3 


„ xiv.. 67 


. 83 


xxvi. 16 


• 93 


XV. 21 


• 15 


XX vi. 29 


• 93 


XV. 29, 30 


. 128 


xxvi. 46 


. 64 


„ xvi. 12 


. 32 


xxvi. 47 


. 24 






xxvi, 49 


. 104 


Luke i. 71 


. 130 


xxvi. 50 


. 42 


,» ii. 2 


. 45 


xxvi. 62 


. 84 


„ iii. 12 


• 33 


xxvi. 69 


. 83 


„ iii. 23, 38 


. 116 


xxvi. 73 


. 24 


iv. 34 


II 


xxvii. I 


. 106 


„ v. 10 


. 22 


xxvii. 28 


• 52 


„ vi. 21 


. 82 


xxvii. 32 


. 15 


vi. 43 


. 57 






„ vii. I 


. 18 


i. 8 


. 27 


„ viii. 27 


. 102 


i. 16 


. 91 


„ viii. 28 


. II 


i. 24 


. II 


„ viii. 41 


. 81 


i.38 


. 89 


ix. 3 


. 27 


ii. 8 


. 28 


„ X. 4 


. 27 


ii. 12 


• 23 


X. 34 


. 23 


ii. 15 


• 33 


xi. 38 


. 66 


iii. 10 


. 44 


» xi. 43 


II 


iii. 20 


• 47 


xii. 24 


. 117 


V. 7 


. II 


„ xii. 29 


. 53 


V.36 


. 77 


xii. 39 


. 25 


vi. 8 


. 27 


„ xii. 40, 43 


. 123 


vii. 3, 4 


. 66 


xiv. 27 


. 67 


vii. 28 


• 33 


XV. 12, 13 


. 128 


vii. 35 


. 18 


XV. 17 


. 6 


ix. 3 


. 80 


„ xvi. 2, 3, 4 


. 25 


ix. 28 


. 47 


„ xvi. 16 


. 67 


X. 45 


7^90 


„ xvi. 23 


. 81 



ISO 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Luke 



John 





PAGE 






PAGE 


xvi. 29 


. 84 


John 


viii. 34 


. 114 


xvii. 8 


40 




viii. 51 


. 17 


xviii. 22 


77 




viii. 56 


. 97 


XX. 2 


6 




ix. 2, 19 


. 70 


XX, 20 


106 




X. 27 


. 103 


XX. 44 


34 




X. 31 


. . 67 


xxi. 25 


46 




xi. 7 


. . 64 


xxi. 34 


79 




xi. 32 


. . 83 


xxii. 32 


. 73 




xi. 37 


. • 95 


xxii. 55 


94 




xii. 6 


. . 67 


xxiv. 25 


53 




xii. 25 


. . 83 








xii. 32 


. 99 


i. I .92 


, 107 




xii. 40 


. 73 


i. 2 


92 




xiii. 21 


. 28 


i. 8 


38 




xiv. 4 


. . 89 


i. 15 


61 




xiv. 9 


. . 46 


i. 18 


91 




XV. 2 


. 114 


i. 26 


94 




XV. 14 


. Ill 


i. 30 


93 




XV. 18 


. 62 


i. 41 


16 




xvi. 12 


. 67 


i. 51 


86 




xvii. 24 


. 96 


ii. 4 


II 




xviii. 34 


. 37 


ii. 18 


83 




xix. 35 


. 38 


iii. 3, 7 . 


88 




XX. II, 12 


. 75 


iii. 8 . 2 


8,64 




XX. 15 


. 67 


iii. 18 


99 








iii. 20 . 5 


5,78 


Acts 


i. I 


. 62 


iii. 21 


78 


j> 


i. 10 


. 100 


iv. 14 


17 


>> 


ii. 41 


. 34 


iv. 24 


107 


j> 


iii. 12 


. 21 


iv. 29 


98 


,, 


iii. 19 


. 73 


iv. 34 . 4 


5» 96 


,, 


iii. 22 


. 85 


iv. 52 


7 


,, 


iii. 23 


. 34 


V. 25, 28 . 


85 


>> 


V. 17 


. 16 


V. 29 


79 


,, 


vii. 14 


34, 35 


vi. 18 


86 


», 


viii. 3 


. 80 


vi. 58 


17 


>) 


viii. 36 


. 100 


vii. 35 


89 


)> 


ix. 33 


. 23 


viii. 8 


75 


,, 


X. 2 


. 21 


viii. 17 


86 


>» 


xiii. 2 


. 77 



Acts 



Rom. 



INDEX 


TO REFERENCES. 


151 




PAGE 






PAGE 


5 XV. 5 


. 16 


Rom. 


iv. 13 


. . 46 


XV. 8, 9 . 


. 114 




vi. 6 


. 113 


xvi. 23, 25 . 


. 124 




vi. II 


. 36, 102 


xvii. 6 


. 80 




vi. 17 


. 10 


xvii. 20 


. 18 




vi. 23 


. 113 


xvii. 22 


. 61 




vii. 6 


. 106 


xvii. 24 


• 131 




vii. 7 


. 115 


xvii. 27 


. 107 




vii. 15, 16 


1,78 


xvii. 28 


. 76 




vii. 24 


. 59, 117 


xvii. 29 


. 51 




vii. 25 


. 10 


xvii. 31 


. 8 




viii. 10 


. 54 


xvii. 32 


. 85 




viii. 21 


. 114 


XX. 19 


. 131 




ix. II 


. 55 


XX. 26 


9 




X. 13 


. Ill 


XX. 33 


. 115 




xi.8 


. 9 


xxi. 14 


. no 




xi. II 


. 95 


xxi. 22 


. 85 




xii. 2 


. 32 


xxi. 31 


. 43 




xii. 9 


. 105 


xxiii. 8 


. 99 




xii. 10 


. 60, 116 


xxiii. 24 


. 23 




xii. 16 


. 105 


xxiv. 5 


. 16 




xiii. 3, 4 


. 120 


xxvi. 9 


• 7 




xiii. 9 


36, 37, "5 


xxvi. 26 


. 5 




XV. 27 


. 77 


xxvii. 14 


. 65 








xxvii. 19 , 


50 


I Cor. 


i. 4 


. 74 


xxvii. 27 


64 




i. II 


. 81 


xxvii. 34 


130 




i. 18 


. 112 


xxvii. 37 


34 




iii. 10 


. 19 


xxviii. 15 


74 




iv.4 


• "9 


xxviii. 26 


85 




iv. 8 


. 6 


xxviii. 28 


85 




iv. 14 
iv. 15 


. 127 

. 26 


i. 16 


129 




vi. 6 


. 16 


i. 20 


49 




vi. 15 


. 109 


i. 23 . . 


91 




vi. 19 


24, 109 


ii. 3 


79 




vii. 26 


. 50 


ii. 15 . 


118 




vii. 31 


. 32 


iii. 4 


7 




vii. 35 


• 50 


iii. 19 


76 




viii. 2 


. 123 


iii. 20 . i 


ft 13 




ix. 6 


. II 



152 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Cor 


ix. 27 




PAGE 
. 48, 71 


j» 


X. 29 




• 37 


»» 
>, 
»» 


X. 31 

xi. 7 
xi. 18 




. 119 
. 116 
. 81 


»> 


xi. 19 




. 16 




xi. 34 
xii. 15, 


16 


. 47 
. 92 


>> 


xiii. 4 




. 72 


J, 


xiii. 13 




. 61 


,, 


xiv. 24, 


25 


. 125 


>> 


xiv. 35 
XV. 3 




• 47 
. 116 


>» 


XV. 47 




. 117 


j> 


XV. 51 




. 10 


>> 


xvi. 6 




. lOI 


Cor. 


i. 8 




. 93 




ii. 14 
iii. I 




io>75 
. 82 




iii. 14 
iv.5 




• 9 

. 36 


»» 


iv. 8 




. 74 


>» 


V. 4 




. "7 


J5 


vii. I 




. 114 


>» 


viii. 16 




. 10 


»» 


viii. 23 




. 22 


ft 


ix. 15 




. 10 


>» 


X. 12 




. 82 


J> 


X. 13, 


I5> 


16 . 21 


»» 


xi. I 




. 6 


J, 


xi. 9 
xii. 8 




• 38 
. 87 


»> 
5> 


xii. II 
xiii. 5, 6 


,7 


• 53 
. 48 


>> 


i. 10 
i. 13 


• 


.115 
. 18 


t* 


i. 20 


. 


. 100 


»» 


ii. 6 


. 


. 29 



Gal. 



Eph. 



Phil. 



Col. 





PAGE 


iii. 24, 25 


. 26 


iv. 3 


• 31 


iv. 9 


. 31, 88 


iv. 20 


. 100 


V. 12 


. 6 


V. 14 


. . 36 


V. 26 


• 51 


vi. 3 


. 123 


vi. 10 


. 127 


vi. 16 


. 21 


ii. 10 


. 119 


iii. 2 


. 25 


iv. I 


. 4 


iv. 6 


. 116 


iv. 13, 14 


. 59 


iv. 19 


. 129 


iv. 22 


. 18 


iv. 29 


. 58, 121 


iv. 30 


. 109 


V. 5 


• 13 


V. 33 


. 96 


vi. 6, 7 


. no 


vi. 18 


. . 63 


ii. 6 


. 81 


ii. 7 


. 32 


ii. IS 


. 94 


iii. 13 


. 102 


iii. 16 


. 104 


iv. II 


. 124 


iv. 18 


. 6s 


i. 25 


' 25 


ii. 4 


. 97 


ii. 8 


• 31 


ii. IS . 


. 75 


ii. 20 


. 31 


iii. 8 


. 17 


iii. 16 


. 112 


iv. 6 


. 121 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Thess. i. 5 
), iv. I 
V. 23 



I Tim. 



11. 4 
ii. 8 

ii. 9 
iii. 2 
iv. I, 2 
iv, 7 
iv. 8 
iv. IS 

v. I 

V. 8 

vi. 9, 10 
vi. II 

ii. 4 

".5 
ii. 24 
ii. 25 

iii. 5 
iii. 6 
iv. 7 

i. I 

i. 15 

ii. 13 

iv. 7 



Phm. 13, 14 



2 Tim. 



Tit. 



Heb. 



1.3 
ii. I 

ii. 3 
ii. 15 
iv. 13 
v. 12 
v. 13 
v. 14 



PAGE 
. 41 

. 54 

• 9 
. 55 

• 52 
. 52 
. 118 
. 70 
. 8 
. 29 
. 72 
. 127 
. 122 
. 21 

. 72 

2 

. 19 

. 9 

. 32 

. 20 

. 70 

. 9 
. 118 

. 9 

. 70 

. 69 

. 34 
. 79 
. 45 
. 123 
92, 108 
. 31 
■ 59 
53,70 



Heb. 



James 



I Pet. 



X. 6 

X. II 

X. 26 

xii. 2 
xii. 15 
xiii. 6 
xiii. 17 

i. 4 
i. 19 
i. 25 

ii. 5 
ii. 10 

ii. 23 

iii. 2 

iii. 7 

iv. 3 

iv. 6 

iv. 7 

iv. 14 
V. 12 

ii. 12 
iii. 3» 4 



2 Pet. i. 4 

ii. 9 
„ ii. 20 

,, iii. 10, 12 
„ iii. 16 

1 John i. 6 
„ iii. 14 

2 John 12 

3 John 13 
Jude 6 . 



PAGE 
. IIO 

. 77 
9, 135 
5,90 
. 73 
. Ill 
. 63 

. 54 
. 121 

• 75 
. 56 
. 112 
. Ill 
. 112 
. 10 
. 108 
. 130 
. no 
. 8 
. 121 

. 18 
. 120 
. 73 

. 22 
. "3 

. 72 
. 31 
. "3 

. Ill 
. 84 

. 68 
. 68 
. 49 



154 



INDEX TO REFERENCES. 



Rev. 





PAGE 


ii. 9 


. 102 


ii. i6 


. 103 


iii. 15 


. 6 


iii. 17 


• 59 


iii. 18 


. 22 


vii. 13 


. 86 


viii. 5 


. 87 


xiv. 13 


• 97 


xvii. 4 


• 51 


Kviii. 7 


• 20 



Old Testament. 
Gen. ii. 7 . . . 117 



Deut. X. 22 
,, xviii. 19 

Ps. cxliii. 2 



35 
35 



13 



( 155 ) 



Other References. 



Antoninus, 133 
Aristotle, 25 

Bible SttidieSy 16, 19, 21, 30 
Bonhoffer {Epiktet u. d. Neue 

Testament)^ 59 
Bruce, 42 

Catullus, 49 
Creeds, 128 

Deissmann, 16, 19, 21, 26, 27, 
30. 51. 136 

Expository II, 49, 64,80, 125 
Expos. Gk. Test., 5, 31, 42, 5^, 
97 

Hesiod, 8 1 
Homer, 56, 132 

Inscriptions, 19, 21, 26, 51 

Knowling, 5 

Liddell and Scott, 56 

Light from the Ancient East, 51 

Lightfoot {Epist. to Phil.), 32, 

33 
Lucian, 37 



Luther, 42 
LXX., 35, 85, 117 

Martial, 51 
Milligan, 136 
Mofifatt, II, 125 
Moulton, 14, 36, 37, 43, 61, 62, 
69, 95, 104, 136 

New Light, 26 

Papyri, 14, 49, 64, 80, 137 
Plato, 5, 6, 14, 25, 39, 72 
Plutarch, 51 
Polybius, 51, 77, 79 
Proleg., 14, 36, 37, 43, 61, 95> 
104 

Rouse, 133 

Sabellius, 29 

Sanday and Headlam {^Romans), 

33.54 
Strachan, 31 

Vulgate, 40, 42 

Weizsacker, 42 
Westcott {Hebrews), 34 
W. H. Margin, 66 

Xenophon, 25 



( 157 ) 



INDEX TO SUBJECTS. 



Accusative Absolute, loi 

,, and Infinitive, loi, 

I02 
Adjectives, List of, 48-60 
Adorning (Inner Man), 120 
Adverbs ('Motion to'), 88, 

89,90 
Aorist, Gnomic, 3, 87 
Article, Omitted, 44, 45, 46, 47 
Augment, Omitted, 85, 86 

Baptism, 134, 135 
Body (clay), 117 
Business, Man's, in, 112 

Circumcision, 134, 135 
Company, Evil, 116 
Comparatives and Superlatives, 

60, 61, 62 
Conscience, 118, 119 
Contentment, 123, 124, 126 
Conversion, 73, no 
Covetousness, 115, 129 
Cynic, The, 49, 72 

Dative (Duration of time), 102 
,, ('Motion to *), 102, 103 

Death, Coming of, 123 
„ Fear of, 123 

Diminutives, 20, 103, 104 * 

Domitian, 134 



Emphasis, Loss of, 103, 104 
Epictetus, Lofty tone explained, 

136 
Extravagance, 122 

God, Act in a Manner worthy 
of, 119 

,, Care of, 108 

,, Essence of, 107, 128 

,, Fellowship with, I n 

,, Friend of, in 

,, Nature and Attributes of, 
107, 108, 109 

,, Omnipresence and Omni- 
science of, 107 

„ Pleasing, 114, 1 15 

„ Thankfulness to, 74, in 

,, Trust in, no 
Good, Do the, 120 

Hebraism, 13, 19, 35 
Helper, God as, in 
Humility, 123, 130, 133 

Imperative, Infinitive for, 104 



Judas, 3 
Julian, 133 

Language, Non-literary, 
137 



136, 



158 



INDEX TO SUBJECTS. 



Life, Cleansing the, 1 14 
Loss, Sin brings, 112 

Man, God's Son, 116 
„ God in, 109 
,, Superiority of, 117 

Nature, Man's, 116 
Nouns, List of, 15-35 
N.T., Acquaintance of.E. with, 
134, 135 

Pantheism, 133 

Participle (for Imperative), 104, 

105 
Polytheism, 132 
Power, the Supreme, 131 
Prayer, God the Answerer of, 

108 
Preposition, Adjective as, 94 

,, Adverb governed 

by, 93 
Pronouns (Omitted), 43, 44 
„ (Reflexive), 36, 37 
„ (Relatives and Inter- 
rogative confused), 39, 
40, 41, 42 



Religion, Essence of, 109, 1 10 
Repentance, 124 
Riches, 122 
Right, Do, 120 

Sin (Error), 2, 112, 113, 133, 

134 
,, Punishment for, 113 
Slave Master, Sin as, 113 
Soul, Immortality of, 118 
Speech, 120, 121, 122 
Stoicism, 131, 133 
Stumbling, Sin as, 112 
Success, Rejoice in Another's, 

IIS, 116 
Swearing, 121 

Teacher, The, 2, 124, 125, 135 

Verbs, Compound, 104 
„ List of, 63-82 
,, Plural (after Neut. PI.), 

103 
,, —Perfect Tense, 86, 87 
,, — Verbal Forms, 82-86 

Will, God's, no 



LONDON : PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, 
DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E., AND GREAT WINDMILL STREET, W. 



AN INTRODUCTION TO 
THE STUDY OF 

New Testament Greek 

WITH A FIRST READER 

BY 

JAMES HOPE MOULTON, ma., d.lit. 

Hon. D.D. (Edin.), Hon. D.C.L. (Durham), 
Hon. D.Theol. (Berlin) 

Late Fellow of 

KING'S COLLEGE. CAMBRIDGE 

Greenwood Professor of 
Hellenistic Greek and Indo- 
European Philology in the 

UNIVERSITY OF MANCHESTER 

" Indispensable to beginners." — Collegian. 

" This work is specially intended and constructed for those who begin New 
Testament Greek without any previous knowledge of the language. . . . 
What is given is so good that we are moved to ask for more."— 
W. H. Bennett, M.A., in the British Weekly. 



THIRD EDITION REVISED. 

Small Crown 8vo. 3/6. Cloth Gilt. 



CHARLES H. KELLY, 

25-35, City Road, and 26, Paternoster Row, London, E.G. 

and or all Booksellers. 



Manuals for Christian Thinkers 

General Editor: JOHN TELFORD, B.A. 

Small Crown 8vo., Art Cloth, Is. net each. Limp Lambskin, gilt top, 
2s. 6d. net each. 



The Psychology of the Christian Life. Eric S. Waterhouse, 

M.A., B.D.^ 

Miracles : An Outline of the Christian View. Frederic Piatt, 

M.A., B.D. 

The Hymns of Methodism in their Literary Relations. 

Henry Bett. 

The French Revolution. Emest E. Keiiett, m.a. 

The Church of Twenty Centuries. A. w. Harrison, B.Sc, B.D. 

Religious Experience : Its Reality and Value. T. F. Lockyer, 

B.A. 
Homer. A. S. Way, M.A., D.Lit. 

The Old Testament and Arehseology. C. L. Bedale, M.A. 
The Books of the New Testament. John S. Banks, D.D. 
Progressive British India. Saint Nihai Singh. 
The Protestant Churches : Their History and Beliefs. Leslie 

F. Church, B.A., F.R.Hist.S. 

The MedisBval Revival. Arthur Rudman. 

Japan's Modernization. Saint Nihal Singh. 

The Church in the New Testament. E. E. Genner, M.A. 

The Religion of our Northern Ancestors. Ernest E. Kellett, 

M.A. 

The Canon of the New Testament. R. Waddy Poikinghorne. 
IN PREPARATION, 

The Reformation, h. b. Workman, m.a., D.Lit. 
Christianity in the Roman Empire. R. Martin Pope, M.A. 

The Apostles* Creed. R. Waddy Moss, D.D. 

The Popes of Rome. w. E. Beet, m.a. 

The Ethical Tendency of Shakespeare's Plays. A. S. Way, 

D.Lit. 

The Greek Tragedians. A. S. Way, M.A., D.Lit. 

Christian Ethics. A. E. Balch, M.A. 

Jewish Sects and Parties : Their Origin, History, and Beliefs. 

J. W. Lightley, M.A. 

Essentials of the Christian Faith. Frank Richards, M.A., 

Kingswood School, 

The Making of the Old Testament, w. F. Lofthouse, m.a. 



Charles H. Kelly, ll?hSiLfZ'''v^t London, E.C. 

And of all Bookselleps and LlbPaPies. 



RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
University of California Library 
or to the 
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
University of California 
Richmond, CA 94804-4698 



ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 

• 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
(510)642-6753 | 

• 1 -year loans may be recharged by bringing ' — 
books to NRLF _ 

• Renewals and recharges may be made 4 

days prior to due date. J^ 

DUE AS STAMPED BELOW — 




^^jrm 



MAR 6 20Q7 



12,000(11/95) 



.EY 

(H)$ 




UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 



GENERAL LIBRARY -U.C. BERKELEY 



BDDm53S7fl